Adaptive Trend & Momentum [ATM] - All-in-One Confirmation Tired of Cluttered Charts and Conflicting Signals? This All-in-One Indicator is Your Solution.
The Adaptive Trend & Momentum (ATM) indicator is a powerful, next-generation trading tool designed to eliminate chart clutter and provide clear, high-conviction signals. Instead of using multiple conflicting indicators, the ATM system combines trend, momentum, and volatility into a single, cohesive, and adaptive framework. It automatically adjusts to changing market conditions, giving you a reliable edge in any environment.
This is not just another moving average crossover. It is a complete trading system that helps you identify the trend, confirm its strength, and time your entries with precision.
Key Features
•
Adaptive Moving Average (AMA): The core of the system. The AMA automatically adjusts its length based on market volatility (using the Average True Range). It becomes faster and more responsive in volatile markets to catch moves early, and smoother in calm markets to avoid noise and false signals.
•
Dynamic Volatility Bands: These bands expand and contract based on market volatility, providing a dynamic map of support and resistance. They are crucial for identifying pullback opportunities and setting effective stop-loss levels.
•
Integrated Momentum Oscillator: A smoothed RSI-based oscillator that runs in a separate pane. It is designed to confirm the signals from the main chart. The oscillator and its histogram are color-coded to show whether bullish or bearish momentum is in control, giving you an instant read on market strength.
•
Clear Consensus Signals: The ATM indicator provides four distinct, easy-to-read signals directly on your chart:
•
STRONG BUY: The highest-conviction signal, appearing when the trend is bullish, momentum is bullish, and the price has pulled back to a strategic entry zone near the AMA.
•
BUY: A standard confirmation signal when both trend and momentum are aligned to the upside.
•
STRONG SELL: The highest-conviction short signal, appearing when the trend is bearish, momentum is bearish, and the price has rallied to a strategic entry zone.
•
SELL: A standard confirmation signal when both trend and momentum are aligned to the downside.
•
Real-Time Dashboard: A convenient on-chart table that provides a complete overview of the market at a glance. It shows the current adaptive length, trend direction, momentum status, consensus signal, and volatility percentage, so you always know what the indicator is thinking.
How It Works: The Adaptive Engine
The magic of the ATM indicator lies in its adaptive engine. Traditional moving averages use a fixed length (e.g., 50-period MA), which can be too slow in a fast market or too sensitive in a choppy one. The ATM’s Adaptive Moving Average solves this by dynamically adjusting its calculation period in real-time:
When volatility increases, the AMA shortens its length to react more quickly to price changes. When volatility decreases, it lengthens its period to smooth out noise and prevent false signals.
This adaptive nature ensures that the indicator remains relevant and effective across different assets and timeframes, from scalping to swing trading.
How to Use This Indicator: A Simple Trading Strategy
The ATM indicator is designed for clarity and ease of use. Here is a basic framework for trading with it:
For Long (Buy) Positions:
1.
Identify the Trend: Wait for the Adaptive Moving Average (AMA) line to turn green, indicating a confirmed uptrend.
2.
Confirm with Momentum: Check that the momentum oscillator is above 50 and preferably rising, confirming bullish strength.
3.
Find Your Entry: The best entry is a "STRONG BUY" signal. This tells you that the price has pulled back to a value area within the uptrend, offering a high-probability entry. A standard "BUY" signal can also be used, but the conviction is higher on "STRONG" signals.
4.
Set Your Stop-Loss: A logical place for a stop-loss is just below the lower volatility band.
5.
Take Profit: Consider taking profits when an opposing "SELL" or "STRONG SELL" signal appears, or when the price reaches a key resistance level.
For Short (Sell) Positions:
1.
Identify the Trend: Wait for the Adaptive Moving Average (AMA) line to turn red, indicating a confirmed downtrend.
2.
Confirm with Momentum: Check that the momentum oscillator is below 50 and preferably falling, confirming bearish strength.
3.
Find Your Entry: The best entry is a "STRONG SELL" signal. This indicates the price has rallied to a resistance area within the downtrend, offering a prime shorting opportunity. A standard "SELL" signal can also be used.
4.
Set Your Stop-Loss: A logical place for a stop-loss is just above the upper volatility band.
5.
Take Profit: Consider taking profits when an opposing "BUY" or "STRONG BUY" signal appears, or when the price reaches a key support level.
Customization and Settings
The indicator is fully customizable to fit your trading style and the asset you are trading. You can adjust:
•
AMA Settings: Control the base length and the volatility multiplier to make the indicator more or less sensitive.
•
Momentum Settings: Adjust the RSI length and smoothing for the oscillator.
•
Volatility Bands: Change the multiplier to widen or narrow the bands.
•
Visuals: Toggle signals, labels, and the dashboard on or off, and customize all colors to your preference.
Summary
The Adaptive Trend & Momentum (ATM) indicator is more than just a tool; it is a complete system for making more confident trading decisions. By adapting to the market and combining trend, momentum, and volatility, it provides a clear, uncluttered, and powerful view of price action.
Add it to your chart today and experience the clarity of adaptive trading!
Disclaimer: This indicator is a tool for technical analysis and should not be considered financial advice. Trading involves risk, and you should always use proper risk management. Past performance is not indicative of future results. Practice on a demo account before trading with real capital.
Keywords: Adaptive, Moving Average, Trend, Momentum, Volatility, RSI, Bands, Signal, Confirmation, All-in-One, System, Strategy, ATR, Volatility, Dashboard, Alert
ابحث في النصوص البرمجية عن "entry"
Katz Candle Momentum Reversal Indicator v4.1Katz Candle Momentum Reversal Indicator (CMRI) v4.1
Overview
The Katz CMRI is a comprehensive trading indicator designed to identify trend direction, momentum shifts, and potential market reversals. It combines several different concepts into a single, cohesive visual tool.
At its core, the indicator uses a custom Line Break chart calculation to filter out market noise and a Heikin-Ashi-style formula to smooth price action. This combination helps to more clearly define the underlying trend. The main output is a dynamic, multi-colored trend line accompanied by various signals that appear directly on your chart. It's designed to help traders stay with the trend while also spotting key moments of expansion, contraction, and potential reversal.
How to Interpret the Indicator
The indicator has several key visual components:
Main Trend Line: This is the thick, central line that changes color.
Green: Indicates a bullish (upward) trend.
Red: Indicates a bearish (downward) trend.
Faded/Light Colors: Suggest a potential loss of momentum or a pullback within the trend.
White: Signals a significant break in the trend structure.
Trend Cloud: The shaded area between the main trend line and the white midline (mid). A green cloud shows the trend is above the midpoint, while a red cloud shows it's below.
Upper/Lower Bands: The aqua (Trend Up) and yellow (Trend Down) lines represent the recent highs and lows of the established trend. When price is pushing against these bands, it signals trend strength.
Background Colors:
Gray: A "Contraction Zone." This indicates that the trend is losing momentum and consolidating, warning of potential chop or a reversal.
Blue: An "Expansion Event." This highlights a sudden increase in momentum in the direction of the trend.
Signal Shapes:
Diamonds: These are the primary entry signals. A green diamond below a candle signals a potential long entry, while a red diamond above a candle signals a potential short entry.
⬆️⬇️ Arrows: These are secondary momentum signals. They can be used as confirmation that the trend is continuing.
Trading Strategy & Rules
This strategy uses the primary diamond signals for entries and trend changes for exits.
Long Trade (Buy) Rules
Entry: Wait for a green diamond to appear below the price candles. For confirmation, the main trend line should turn solid green, and the price should ideally be above the white midline.
Exit:
Stop Loss: Place a stop loss below the recent swing low or below the candle where the green diamond appeared.
Take Profit: Consider exiting the trade when a red diamond appears above the candles, signaling a potential trend reversal. Alternatively, a trader might exit if the background turns gray (Contraction Zone), indicating the bullish momentum has faded.
Short Trade (Sell) Rules
Entry: Wait for a red diamond to appear above the price candles. For confirmation, the main trend line should turn solid red, and the price should ideally be below the white midline.
Exit:
Stop Loss: Place a stop loss above the recent swing high or above the candle where the red diamond appeared.
Take Profit: Consider exiting the trade when a green diamond appears below the candles. A gray "Contraction Zone" can also serve as an early warning to exit as bearish momentum wanes.
Indicator Filters Explained
The indicator includes a "Trend Filter Type" setting that allows you to adjust its sensitivity. This can help reduce false signals in choppy markets.
Raw: This is the most sensitive setting. It will generate a trend change signal as soon as the basic conditions are met. Use this for scalping or in strongly trending markets, but be aware that it may produce more false signals.
OutStep: This is the default, balanced setting. It adds an extra layer of confirmation by requiring the main trend line itself to be moving in the direction of the new trend. For example, a new green signal will only be confirmed if the trend line's value is higher than its previous value. This helps filter out weak signals.
FullStep: This is the most conservative and filtered setting. It includes the "OutStep" logic and adds further conditions related to the upper and lower trend bands. This setting will produce the fewest signals, but they are generally the highest quality, making it suitable for swing trading or avoiding choppy market conditions.
Disclaimer
This indicator is a tool for technical analysis and should not be considered financial advice. All trading involves substantial risk, including the possible loss of principal. Past performance is not indicative of future results. The signals generated by this indicator are for educational and informational purposes only. You are solely responsible for any trading decisions you make. Use this indicator at your own risk.
Trishul Tap Signals (v6) — Liquidity Sweep + Imbalanced RetestTrishul Tap Signals — Liquidity Sweep + Imbalanced Retest
Type: Signal-only indicator (non-repainting)
Style: Price-action + Liquidity + Trend-following
Best for: Intraday & Swing Trading — any liquid market (stocks, futures, crypto, FX)
Timeframes: Any (5m–1D recommended)
Concept
The Trishul Tap setup is a liquidity-driven retest play inspired by order-flow and Smart Money Concepts.
It identifies one-sided impulse candles that also sweep liquidity (grab stops above/below a recent swing), then waits for price to retest the origin of that candle to enter in the trend direction.
Think of it as the three points of a trident:
Trend filter — Only signals with the prevailing trend.
Liquidity sweep — Candle takes out a recent swing high/low (stop-hunt).
Imbalanced retest — Price taps the candle’s open/low (bull) or open/high (bear).
Bullish Setup
Trend Filter: Price above EMA(200).
Impulse Candle:
Green close.
Upper wick ≥ (wickRatio × lower wick).
Lower wick ≤ (oppWickMaxFrac × full range).
Liquidity Sweep: Candle’s high exceeds the highest high of the last sweepLookback bars (excluding current).
Tap Entry: Buy signal triggers when price later taps the candle’s low or open (user choice) within expireBars.
Bearish Setup
Trend Filter: Price below EMA(200).
Impulse Candle:
Red close.
Lower wick ≥ (wickRatio × upper wick).
Upper wick ≤ (oppWickMaxFrac × full range).
Liquidity Sweep: Candle’s low breaks the lowest low of the last sweepLookback bars (excluding current).
Tap Entry: Sell signal triggers when price later taps the candle’s high or open (user choice) within expireBars.
Inputs
Trend EMA Length: Default 200.
Sweep Lookback: Number of bars for liquidity sweep check (default 20).
Wick Ratio: Required size ratio of dominant wick to opposite wick (default 2.0).
Opposite Wick Max %: Opposite wick must be ≤ this fraction of the candle’s range (default 25%).
Tap Tolerance (ticks): How close price must come to the level to count as a tap.
Expire Bars: Max bars after setup to allow a valid tap.
One Signal per Level: If ON, a base is “consumed” after first signal.
Plot Tap Levels: Show horizontal lines for active bases.
Show Setup Labels: Mark the origin sweep candle.
Plots & Visuals
EMA Trend Line — trend filter reference.
Tap Levels —
Green = bullish base (origin candle’s low/open).
Red = bearish base (origin candle’s high/open).
Labels — Show where the setup candle formed.
Signals —
BUY: triangle-up below bar at bullish tap.
SELL: triangle-down above bar at bearish tap.
Alerts
Two built-in conditions:
BUY Signal (Trishul Tap) — triggers on bullish tap.
SELL Signal (Trishul Tap) — triggers on bearish tap.
Set via Alerts panel → Condition = this indicator → Choose signal type.
How to Trade It
Use in liquid markets with clean price structure.
Confirm with HTF structure, volume spikes, or other confluence if desired.
Place stop just beyond the tap level (or ATR-based).
Target 1–2R or trail behind structure.
Why It Works
Liquidity sweep traps traders entering late (breakout buyers or panic sellers) and forces them to exit in the opposite direction, fueling your entry.
Wick imbalance confirms directional aggression by one side.
Trend filter keeps you aligned with the market’s dominant flow.
Retest entry lets you enter at a better price with reduced risk.
Non-Repainting
Setups form only on confirmed bar closes.
Signals trigger only on later bars that tap the stored level.
No lookahead functions are used.
Disclaimer
This script is for educational purposes only and does not constitute financial advice. Test thoroughly in a simulator or demo before using in live markets. Trading involves risk.
T3 JMA KAMA VWMAEnhancing Trading Performance with T3 JMA KAMA VWMA Indicator
Introduction
In the dynamic world of trading, staying ahead of market trends and capitalizing on volume-driven opportunities can greatly influence trading performance. To address this, we have developed the T3 JMA KAMA VWMA Indicator, an innovative tool that modifies the traditional Volume Weighted Moving Average (VWMA) formula to increase responsiveness and exploit high-volume market conditions for optimal position entry. This article delves into the idea behind this modification and how it can benefit traders seeking to gain an edge in the market.
The Idea Behind the Modification
The core concept behind modifying the VWMA formula is to leverage more responsive moving averages (MAs) that align with high-volume market activity. Traditional VWMA utilizes the Simple Moving Average (SMA) as the basis for calculating the weighted average. While the SMA is effective in providing a smoothed perspective of price movements, it may lack the desired responsiveness to capitalize on short-term volume-driven opportunities.
To address this limitation, our T3 JMA KAMA VWMA Indicator incorporates three advanced moving averages: T3, JMA, and KAMA. These MAs offer enhanced responsiveness, allowing traders to react swiftly to changing market conditions influenced by volume.
T3 (T3 New and T3 Normal):
The T3 moving average, one of the components of our indicator, applies a proprietary algorithm that provides smoother and more responsive trend signals. By utilizing T3, we ensure that the VWMA calculation aligns with the dynamic nature of high-volume markets, enabling traders to capture price movements accurately.
JMA (Jurik Moving Average):
The JMA component further enhances the indicator's responsiveness by incorporating phase shifting and power adjustment. This adaptive approach ensures that the moving average remains sensitive to changes in volume and price dynamics. As a result, traders can identify turning points and anticipate potential trend reversals, precisely timing their position entries.
KAMA (Kaufman's Adaptive Moving Average):
KAMA is an adaptive moving average designed to dynamically adjust its sensitivity based on market conditions. By incorporating KAMA into our VWMA modification, we ensure that the moving average adapts to varying volume levels and captures the essence of volume-driven price movements. Traders can confidently enter positions during periods of high trading volume, aligning their strategies with market activity.
Benefits and Usage
The modified T3 JMA KAMA VWMA Indicator offers several advantages to traders looking to exploit high-volume market conditions for position entry:
Increased Responsiveness: By incorporating more responsive moving averages, the indicator enables traders to react quickly to changes in volume and capture short-term opportunities more effectively.
Enhanced Entry Timing: The modified VWMA aligns with high-volume periods, allowing traders to enter positions precisely during price movements influenced by significant trading activity.
Improved Accuracy: The combination of T3, JMA, and KAMA within the VWMA formula enhances the accuracy of trend identification, reversals, and overall market analysis.
Comprehensive Market Insights: The T3 JMA KAMA VWMA Indicator provides a holistic view of market conditions by considering both price and volume dynamics. This comprehensive perspective helps traders make informed decisions.
Analysis and Interpretation
The modified VWMA formula with T3, JMA, and KAMA offers traders a valuable tool for analyzing volume-driven market conditions. By incorporating these advanced moving averages into the VWMA calculation, the indicator becomes more responsive to changes in volume, potentially providing deeper insights into price movements.
When analyzing the modified VWMA, it is essential to consider the following points:
Identifying High-Volume Periods:
The modified VWMA is designed to capture price movements during high-volume periods. Traders can use this indicator to identify potential market trends and determine whether significant trading activity is driving price action. By focusing on these periods, traders may gain a better understanding of the market sentiment and adjust their strategies accordingly.
Confirmation of Trend Strength:
The modified VWMA can serve as a confirmation tool for assessing the strength of a trend. When the VWMA line aligns with the overall trend direction, it suggests that the current price movement is supported by volume. This confirmation can provide traders with additional confidence in their analysis and help them make more informed trading decisions.
Potential Entry and Exit Points:
One of the primary purposes of the modified VWMA is to assist traders in identifying potential entry and exit points. By capturing volume-driven price movements, the indicator can highlight areas where market participants are actively participating, indicating potential opportunities for opening or closing positions. Traders can use this information in conjunction with other technical analysis tools to develop comprehensive trading strategies.
Interpretation of Angle and Gradient:
The modified VWMA incorporates an angle calculation and color gradient to further enhance interpretation. The angle of the VWMA line represents the slope of the indicator, providing insights into the momentum of price movements. A steep angle indicates strong momentum, while a shallow angle suggests a slowdown. The color gradient helps visualize this angle, with green indicating bullish momentum and purple indicating bearish momentum.
Conclusion
By modifying the VWMA formula to incorporate the T3, JMA, and KAMA moving averages, the T3 JMA KAMA VWMA Indicator offers traders an innovative tool to exploit high-volume market conditions for optimal position entry. This modification enhances responsiveness, improves timing, and provides comprehensive market insights.
Enjoy checking it out!
---
Credits to:
◾ @cheatcountry – Hann Window Smoothing
◾ @loxx – T3
◾ @everget – JMA
[SCOPO]Scalping BotEnglish, German is found Below
Scalping Indicator (5min Mostly)
- An Indicator that Creates Possible Trades, created on MA's, Volumebased Support and Ressistance and MACD, The Take Profits are created by a Simple Support and Ressitance Indicator (Built In)
- The Indicator sends with the Alert Function Buy and Sell Signals
- These Signals exists from 3 Entrys, 5 Take Profits and 1 Additional Take Profit who should be used after Entry 2/3 has been filled
- If a Signal gets Invalid or an Entry has been filled ,there comes a new Alert
- The Indicator Plots Lines on the Chart for TP/SL and has an Integrated Backtester table
If you got Questions pls Contact me via PM!
Update Rolled out Today (2.9.2022)
- Its now possible to set your own choosen minimal TP, before was 0.3 % and the next Ressistance above would have been taken for longs
- FilterMA can now be choosen from Different MA's via Dropdown menu
- Length of FilterMA can now be set by user
- Those Changes have been done to make it usefull for higher Timeframes too
German
Scalping Indikator
- Kurzbeschreibung: Ein Indikator der mit EMA & Macd und Volumenbasierten Supports/Ressistance Long - & Shorttrades vorschlägt
- Der Indikator sendet mit der Alarm Funktion Kauf und Verkaufsignale
Diese Signale bestehen aus 3 Entrys, 5 Take Profits sowie 1 Additional Take Profit der Aktiv wird nachdem der Entry 2 / 3 gefüllt wurde
Sollte ein Signal Invalidiert werden dann kommt ein erneuter Alarm
Sollte der 1.Entry gefüllt werden dann kommt auch ein Alarm
- Der Indikator gibt visuell auf dem Chart Linien für TP/SL wieder und besitzt auch ein Integriertes Info Fenster für ehemalige Trades.
- Die TP's werden durch eine eingebaute Support/Ressistance Funktion ausgewählt.
Alle verbesserungsvorschläge bitte per PN an @ridicolous
Update vom 2.9.2022
- Es wurde die möglichkeit mindest TP's zu setzen hinzugefügt
- Die FilterEMA kann nun aus einer Auswahl verschiedener MA's ausgewählt werden
- FilterMA längen können nun angepasstwerden
- Diese Aenderungen wurden hinzugefügt um das Skript auch auf höheren Timeframes laufen lassen zu können
Donchian DipThe Donchian Dip
This strategy is designed to look for good "Buy the Dip" entries on stocks that are clearly in a strong 1-year upward trend. If you do not know how to identify those stocks on your own please do not use this system or continue your education until you do. The Donchian Dip strategy was designed on the daily time frame but works amazingly well on both daily and weekly timeframes. It does still work on intraday charts also if the current trend on the daily chart is in a strong uptrend.
Chart Setup:
3-period Donchian Channel with a 1-period offset (hide basis)
Bollinger Bands with the default settings of 20/2 (display basis)
Entry Signals:
There are 3 different entry signals that will be printed on the chart that have similar underlying criteria but are ranked based on skill level just like ski slope skill levels! I recommend only taking green entries until you are familiar with the system and the stocks you are trading.
Green Easy Entry:
This is the safest buy the dip entry that is normally found at or near a large retracement bottom. You might get one or two bad entries but be persistent and eventually, a great entry will present itself!
These are the specifics for the conditions that trigger a Green entry if you want to know what they are:
1. The current bar is an up bar (green or white bar) and closed above the lower Donchian channel
2. Previous bar or 2 bars back closed below the lower Donchian channel
3. Previous bar or 2 bars back closed below the Bollinger Band Basis (20 SMA )
4. The low of the previous bar or 2 bars back was below the lower Bollinger Band
Blue Intermediate Entry:
This is a decent entry if you missed the green entry, want to add to an existing position, or are not sure it will pull back far enough to even give a green entry. I would suggest only trade these entries to add to an existing pyramid position or get back into a trade that you were recently stopped out of. However, on high-flying stocks like TSLA these signals and the Black Diamond entry signals might be the only ones you get for a long time. Also, on the weekly chart, Blue or Black entries are sometimes all you will get for a year or more.
These are the specifics for the conditions that trigger a Blue entry if you want to know what they are:
1. The current bar is an up bar (green or white bar) and closed above the lower Donchian channel
2. Previous bar or 2 bars back closed below the lower Donchian channel
3. Previous bar or 2 bars back closed below the Bollinger Band Basis (20 SMA )
Black Diamond Advanced Rule:
This is normally just a small pullback re-entry signal on a strong trending stock like TSLA ...trade with extreme caution!!! You have been warned but daredevils feel free to give it a shot. I sometimes do trade these entries if the market and sector of the stock I am trading are extremely bullish or if I am looking to add to a position but I use a conservative stop.
These are the specifics for the conditions that trigger a Black entry if you want to know what they are:
1. The current bar is an up bar (green or white bar) and closed above the lower Donchian channel
2. Previous bar or 2 bars back closed below the lower Donchian channel
3. Previous bar or 2 bars back closed above the Bollinger Band Basis (20 SMA )
Exit Criteria:
The goal of this strategy is to buy the dip and hold as long as possible...let's practice some Paytience and exercise those holding muscles! RLT!!!
So, we don't want to exit early but we also want to protect our profits somehow. We do this by using the built-in trailing stops that are defined by dots of three different shades of purple on the chart (feel free to change these in the settings). Simply move your trailing stop to the highest current dot price level. Do not move the trailing stop down ever even if a lower dot is printed later. These are simply the suggested trailing stops and definitely use your own judgment for exits but if you backtest this strategy enough you will most likely discover that in the long run, these trailing stops work really well.
I hope this strategy helps you to identify good "Buy the Dip" entries on stocks you love as well as trains you to hold your winners longer for bigger gains.
***HOW TO ADD TO YOUR CHARTS***
1) Click the "Add to Favorite Scripts" button
2) Go to a stock chart and click the "Indicators" icon at the top
3) Next, on the left, click the "Favorites" and then click the "Naked Put - Growth Indicator v2"
4) It should appear on your charts, and you can click the "gear" icon on the study to edit a few settings.
5) Read the release notes above so you understand how it works.
Position SizingHello All,
This script can be used for Position Sizing.
After you entered Capital you have, how much you can Risk per Trade, Profit and Stoploss Levels, it calculates Number of Buys/Sells, Position Size and Reward/Risk ratio. you need to choose one of "Long" or "Short" position you will take.
Number of Buys formula = Capital * RiskPerTrade / Loss
Position Size = NumberOfBuys * EntryPrice
Reward / Risk rate = (TargetPrice - EntryPrice) / (EntryPrice - StoplossPrice)
Enjoy!
Market Regime# MARKET REGIME IDENTIFICATION & TRADING SYSTEM
## Complete User Guide
---
## 📋 TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. (#overview)
2. (#regimes)
3. (#indicator-usage)
4. (#entry-signals)
5. (#exit-signals)
6. (#regime-strategies)
7. (#confluence)
8. (#backtesting)
9. (#optimization)
10. (#examples)
---
## OVERVIEW
### What This System Does
This is a **complete market regime identification and trading system** that:
1. **Identifies 6 distinct market regimes** automatically
2. **Adapts trading tactics** to each regime
3. **Provides high-probability entry signals** with confluence scoring
4. **Shows optimal exit points** for each trade
5. **Can be backtested** to validate performance
### Two Components Provided
1. **Indicator** (`market_regime_indicator.pine`)
- Visual regime identification
- Entry/exit signals on chart
- Dynamic support/resistance
- Info tables with live data
- Use for manual trading
2. **Strategy** (`market_regime_strategy.pine`)
- Fully automated backtestable version
- Same logic as indicator
- Position sizing and risk management
- Performance metrics
- Use for backtesting and automation
---
## THE 6 MARKET REGIMES
### 1. 🟢 BULL TRENDING
**Characteristics:**
- Strong uptrend
- Price above SMA50 and SMA200
- ADX > 25 (strong trend)
- Higher highs and higher lows
- DI+ > DI- (bullish momentum)
**What It Means:**
- Market has clear upward direction
- Buyers in control
- Pullbacks are buying opportunities
- Strongest regime for long positions
**How to Trade:**
- ✅ **BUY dips to EMA20 or SMA20**
- ✅ Enter when RSI < 60 on pullback
- ✅ Hold through minor corrections
- ❌ Don't short against the trend
- ❌ Don't sell too early
**Expected Behavior:**
- Pullbacks are shallow (5-10%)
- Bounces are strong
- Support at moving averages holds
- Volume increases on rallies
---
### 2. 🔴 BEAR TRENDING
**Characteristics:**
- Strong downtrend
- Price below SMA50 and SMA200
- ADX > 25 (strong trend)
- Lower highs and lower lows
- DI- > DI+ (bearish momentum)
**What It Means:**
- Market has clear downward direction
- Sellers in control
- Rallies are selling opportunities
- Strongest regime for short positions
**How to Trade:**
- ✅ **SELL rallies to EMA20 or SMA20**
- ✅ Enter when RSI > 40 on bounce
- ✅ Hold through minor bounces
- ❌ Don't buy against the trend
- ❌ Don't cover shorts too early
**Expected Behavior:**
- Rallies are weak (5-10%)
- Selloffs are strong
- Resistance at moving averages holds
- Volume increases on declines
---
### 3. 🔵 BULL RANGING
**Characteristics:**
- Bullish bias but consolidating
- Price near or above SMA50
- ADX < 20 (weak trend)
- Trading in range
- Choppy price action
**What It Means:**
- Uptrend is pausing
- Accumulation phase
- Support and resistance zones clear
- Lower volatility
**How to Trade:**
- ✅ **BUY at support zone**
- ✅ Enter when RSI < 40
- ✅ Take profits at resistance
- ⚠️ Smaller position sizes
- ⚠️ Tighter stops
**Expected Behavior:**
- Range-bound oscillations
- Support bounces repeatedly
- Resistance rejections common
- Eventually breaks higher (usually)
---
### 4. 🟠 BEAR RANGING
**Characteristics:**
- Bearish bias but consolidating
- Price near or below SMA50
- ADX < 20 (weak trend)
- Trading in range
- Choppy price action
**What It Means:**
- Downtrend is pausing
- Distribution phase
- Support and resistance zones clear
- Lower volatility
**How to Trade:**
- ✅ **SELL at resistance zone**
- ✅ Enter when RSI > 60
- ✅ Take profits at support
- ⚠️ Smaller position sizes
- ⚠️ Tighter stops
**Expected Behavior:**
- Range-bound oscillations
- Resistance holds repeatedly
- Support bounces are weak
- Eventually breaks lower (usually)
---
### 5. ⚪ CONSOLIDATION
**Characteristics:**
- No clear direction
- Range compression
- Very low ADX (< 15 often)
- Price inside tight range
- Neutral sentiment
**What It Means:**
- Market is coiling
- Building energy for next move
- Indecision between buyers/sellers
- Calm before the storm
**How to Trade:**
- ✅ **WAIT for breakout direction**
- ✅ Enter on high-volume breakout
- ✅ Direction becomes clear
- ❌ Don't trade inside the range
- ❌ Avoid choppy scalping
**Expected Behavior:**
- Narrow range
- Low volume
- False breakouts possible
- Explosive move when it breaks
---
### 6. 🟣 CHAOS (High Volatility)
**Characteristics:**
- Extreme volatility
- No clear direction
- Erratic price swings
- ATR > 2x average
- Unpredictable
**What It Means:**
- Market panic or euphoria
- News-driven moves
- Emotion dominates logic
- Highest risk environment
**How to Trade:**
- ❌ **STAY OUT!**
- ❌ No positions
- ❌ Wait for stability
- ✅ Protect existing positions
- ✅ Reduce risk
**Expected Behavior:**
- Large intraday swings
- Gaps up/down
- Stop hunts
- Whipsaws
- Eventually calms down
---
## INDICATOR USAGE
### Visual Elements
#### 1. Background Colors
- **Light Green** = Bull Trending (go long)
- **Light Red** = Bear Trending (go short)
- **Light Teal** = Bull Ranging (buy dips)
- **Light Orange** = Bear Ranging (sell rallies)
- **Light Gray** = Consolidation (wait)
- **Purple** = Chaos (stay out!)
#### 2. Regime Labels
- Appear when regime changes
- Show new regime name
- Positioned at highs (bullish) or lows (bearish)
#### 3. Entry Signals
- **Green "LONG"** labels = Buy here
- **Red "SHORT"** labels = Sell here
- Number shows confluence score (X/5 signals)
- Hover for details (stop, target, RSI, etc.)
#### 4. Exit Signals
- **Orange "EXIT LONG"** = Close long position
- **Orange "EXIT SHORT"** = Close short position
- Shows exit reason in tooltip
#### 5. Support/Resistance Lines
- **Green line** = Dynamic support (buy zone)
- **Red line** = Dynamic resistance (sell zone)
- Adapts to regime automatically
#### 6. Moving Averages
- **Blue** = SMA 20 (short-term trend)
- **Orange** = SMA 50 (medium-term trend)
- **Purple** = SMA 200 (long-term trend)
### Information Tables
#### Top Right Table (Main Info)
Shows real-time market conditions:
- **Current Regime** - What regime we're in
- **Bias** - Long, Short, Breakout, or Stay Out
- **ADX** - Trend strength (>25 = strong)
- **Trend** - Strong, Moderate, or Weak
- **Volatility** - High or Normal
- **Vol Ratio** - Current vs average volatility
- **RSI** - Momentum (>70 overbought, <30 oversold)
- **vs SMA50/200** - Price position relative to MAs
- **Support/Resistance** - Exact price levels
- **Long/Short Signals** - Confluence scores (X/5)
#### Bottom Right Table (Regime Guide)
Quick reference for each regime:
- What action to take
- What strategy to use
- Color-coded for quick identification
---
## ENTRY SIGNALS EXPLAINED
### Confluence Scoring System (5 Factors)
Each entry signal is scored 0-5 based on how many factors align:
#### For LONG Entries:
1. ✅ **Regime Alignment** - In Bull Trending or Bull Ranging
2. ✅ **RSI Pullback** - RSI between 35-50 (not overbought)
3. ✅ **Near Support** - Price within 2% of dynamic support
4. ✅ **MACD Turning Up** - Momentum shifting bullish
5. ✅ **Volume Confirmation** - Above average volume
#### For SHORT Entries:
1. ✅ **Regime Alignment** - In Bear Trending or Bear Ranging
2. ✅ **RSI Rejection** - RSI between 50-65 (not oversold)
3. ✅ **Near Resistance** - Price within 2% of dynamic resistance
4. ✅ **MACD Turning Down** - Momentum shifting bearish
5. ✅ **Volume Confirmation** - Above average volume
### Confluence Requirements
**Minimum Confluence** (default = 2):
- 2/5 = Entry signal triggered
- 3/5 = Good signal
- 4/5 = Strong signal
- 5/5 = Excellent signal (rare)
**Higher confluence = Higher probability = Better trades**
### Specific Entry Patterns
#### 1. Bull Trending Entry
```
Requirements:
- Regime = Bull Trending
- Price pulls back to EMA20
- Close above EMA20 (bounce)
- Up candle (close > open)
- RSI < 60
- Confluence ≥ 2
```
#### 2. Bear Trending Entry
```
Requirements:
- Regime = Bear Trending
- Price rallies to EMA20
- Close below EMA20 (rejection)
- Down candle (close < open)
- RSI > 40
- Confluence ≥ 2
```
#### 3. Bull Ranging Entry
```
Requirements:
- Regime = Bull Ranging
- RSI < 40 (oversold)
- Price at or below support
- Up candle (reversal)
- Confluence ≥ 1 (more lenient)
```
#### 4. Bear Ranging Entry
```
Requirements:
- Regime = Bear Ranging
- RSI > 60 (overbought)
- Price at or above resistance
- Down candle (rejection)
- Confluence ≥ 1 (more lenient)
```
#### 5. Consolidation Breakout
```
Requirements:
- Regime = Consolidation
- Price breaks above/below range
- Volume > 1.5x average (explosive)
- Strong directional candle
```
---
## EXIT SIGNALS EXPLAINED
### Three Types of Exits
#### 1. Regime Change Exits (Automatic)
- **Long Exit**: Regime changes to Bear Trending or Chaos
- **Short Exit**: Regime changes to Bull Trending or Chaos
- **Reason**: Market character changed, strategy no longer valid
#### 2. Support/Resistance Break Exits
- **Long Exit**: Price breaks below support by 2%
- **Short Exit**: Price breaks above resistance by 2%
- **Reason**: Key level violated, trend may be reversing
#### 3. Momentum Exits
- **Long Exit**: RSI > 70 (overbought) AND down candle
- **Short Exit**: RSI < 30 (oversold) AND up candle
- **Reason**: Overextension, take profits
### Stop Loss & Take Profit
**Stop Loss** (Automatic in strategy):
- Placed at Entry - (ATR × 2)
- Adapts to volatility
- Protected from whipsaws
- Typically 2-4% for stocks, 5-10% for crypto
**Take Profit** (Automatic in strategy):
- Placed at Entry + (Stop Distance × R:R Ratio)
- Default 2.5:1 reward:risk
- Example: $2 risk = $5 reward target
- Allows winners to run
---
## TRADING EACH REGIME
### BULL TRENDING - Most Profitable Long Environment
**Strategy: Buy Every Dip**
**Entry Rules:**
1. Wait for pullback to EMA20 or SMA20
2. Look for RSI < 60
3. Enter when candle closes above MA
4. Confluence should be 2+
**Stop Loss:**
- Below the recent swing low
- Or 2 × ATR below entry
**Take Profit:**
- At previous high
- Or 2.5:1 R:R minimum
**Position Size:**
- Can use full size (2% risk)
- High win rate regime
**Example Trade:**
```
Price: $100, pulls back to $98 (EMA20)
Entry: $98.50 (close above EMA)
Stop: $96.50 (2 ATR)
Target: $103.50 (2.5:1)
Risk: $2, Reward: $5
```
---
### BEAR TRENDING - Most Profitable Short Environment
**Strategy: Sell Every Rally**
**Entry Rules:**
1. Wait for bounce to EMA20 or SMA20
2. Look for RSI > 40
3. Enter when candle closes below MA
4. Confluence should be 2+
**Stop Loss:**
- Above the recent swing high
- Or 2 × ATR above entry
**Take Profit:**
- At previous low
- Or 2.5:1 R:R minimum
**Position Size:**
- Can use full size (2% risk)
- High win rate regime
**Example Trade:**
```
Price: $100, rallies to $102 (EMA20)
Entry: $101.50 (close below EMA)
Stop: $103.50 (2 ATR)
Target: $96.50 (2.5:1)
Risk: $2, Reward: $5
```
---
### BULL RANGING - Buy Low, Sell High
**Strategy: Range Trading (Long Bias)**
**Entry Rules:**
1. Wait for price at support zone
2. Look for RSI < 40
3. Enter on reversal candle
4. Confluence should be 1-2+
**Stop Loss:**
- Below support zone
- Tighter than trending (1.5 ATR)
**Take Profit:**
- At resistance zone
- Don't hold through resistance
**Position Size:**
- Reduce to 1-1.5% risk
- Lower win rate than trending
**Example Trade:**
```
Range: $95-$105
Entry: $96 (at support, RSI 35)
Stop: $94 (below support)
Target: $104 (at resistance)
Risk: $2, Reward: $8 (4:1)
```
---
### BEAR RANGING - Sell High, Buy Low
**Strategy: Range Trading (Short Bias)**
**Entry Rules:**
1. Wait for price at resistance zone
2. Look for RSI > 60
3. Enter on rejection candle
4. Confluence should be 1-2+
**Stop Loss:**
- Above resistance zone
- Tighter than trending (1.5 ATR)
**Take Profit:**
- At support zone
- Don't hold through support
**Position Size:**
- Reduce to 1-1.5% risk
- Lower win rate than trending
**Example Trade:**
```
Range: $95-$105
Entry: $104 (at resistance, RSI 65)
Stop: $106 (above resistance)
Target: $96 (at support)
Risk: $2, Reward: $8 (4:1)
```
---
### CONSOLIDATION - Wait for Breakout
**Strategy: Breakout Trading**
**Entry Rules:**
1. Identify consolidation range
2. Wait for VOLUME SURGE (1.5x+ avg)
3. Enter on close outside range
4. Direction must be clear
**Stop Loss:**
- Opposite side of range
- Or 2 ATR
**Take Profit:**
- Measure range height, project it
- Example: $10 range = $10 move expected
**Position Size:**
- Reduce to 1% risk
- 50% false breakout rate
**Example Trade:**
```
Consolidation: $98-$102 (4-point range)
Breakout: $102.50 (high volume)
Entry: $103
Stop: $100 (back in range)
Target: $107 (4-point range projected)
Risk: $3, Reward: $4
```
---
### CHAOS - STAY OUT!
**Strategy: Preservation**
**What to Do:**
- ❌ NO new positions
- ✅ Close existing positions if near entry
- ✅ Tighten stops on profitable trades
- ✅ Reduce position sizes dramatically
- ✅ Wait for regime to stabilize
**Why It's Dangerous:**
- Stop hunts are common
- Whipsaws everywhere
- News-driven volatility
- No technical reliability
- Even "perfect" setups fail
**When Does It End:**
- Volatility ratio drops < 1.5
- ADX starts rising (direction appears)
- Price respects support/resistance again
- Usually 1-5 days
---
## CONFLUENCE SYSTEM
### How It Works
The system scores each potential entry on 5 factors. More factors aligning = higher probability.
### Confluence Requirements by Regime
**Trending Regimes** (strictest):
- Minimum 2/5 required
- 3/5 = Good
- 4-5/5 = Excellent
**Ranging Regimes** (moderate):
- Minimum 1-2/5 required
- 2/5 = Good
- 3+/5 = Excellent
**Consolidation** (breakout only):
- Volume is most critical
- Direction confirmation
- Less confluence needed
### Adjusting Minimum Confluence
**If too few signals:**
- Lower from 2 to 1
- More trades, lower quality
**If too many false signals:**
- Raise from 2 to 3
- Fewer trades, higher quality
**Recommendation:**
- Start at 2
- Adjust based on win rate
- Aim for 55-65% win rate
---
## STRATEGY BACKTESTING
### Loading the Strategy
1. Copy `market_regime_strategy.pine`
2. Open Pine Editor in TradingView
3. Paste and "Add to Chart"
4. Strategy Tester tab opens at bottom
### Initial Settings
```
Risk Per Trade: 2%
ATR Stop Multiplier: 2.0
Reward:Risk Ratio: 2.5
Trade Longs: ✓
Trade Shorts: ✓
Trade Trending Only: ✗ (test both)
Avoid Chaos: ✓
Minimum Confluence: 2
```
### What to Look For
**Good Results:**
- Win Rate: 50-60%
- Profit Factor: 1.8-2.5
- Net Profit: Positive
- Max Drawdown: <20%
- Consistent equity curve
**Warning Signs:**
- Win Rate: <45% (too many losses)
- Profit Factor: <1.5 (barely profitable)
- Max Drawdown: >30% (too risky)
- Erratic equity curve (unstable)
### Testing Different Regimes
**Test 1: Trending Only**
```
Trade Trending Only: ✓
Result: Higher win rate, fewer trades
```
**Test 2: All Regimes**
```
Trade Trending Only: ✗
Result: More trades, potentially lower win rate
```
**Test 3: Long Only**
```
Trade Longs: ✓
Trade Shorts: ✗
Result: Works in bull markets
```
**Test 4: Short Only**
```
Trade Longs: ✗
Trade Shorts: ✓
Result: Works in bear markets
```
---
## SETTINGS OPTIMIZATION
### Key Parameters to Adjust
#### 1. Risk Per Trade (Most Important)
- **0.5%** = Very conservative
- **1.0%** = Conservative (recommended for beginners)
- **2.0%** = Moderate (recommended)
- **3.0%** = Aggressive
- **5.0%** = Very aggressive (not recommended)
**Impact:** Higher risk = higher returns BUT bigger drawdowns
#### 2. Reward:Risk Ratio
- **2:1** = More wins needed, hit target faster
- **2.5:1** = Balanced (recommended)
- **3:1** = Fewer wins needed, hold longer
- **4:1** = Very patient, best in trending
**Impact:** Higher R:R = can have lower win rate
#### 3. Minimum Confluence
- **1** = More signals, lower quality
- **2** = Balanced (recommended)
- **3** = Fewer signals, higher quality
- **4** = Very selective
- **5** = Almost never triggers
**Impact:** Higher = fewer but better trades
#### 4. ADX Thresholds
- **Trending: 20-30** (default 25)
- Lower = detect trends earlier
- Higher = only strong trends
- **Ranging: 15-25** (default 20)
- Lower = identify ranging earlier
- Higher = only weak trends
#### 5. Trend Period (SMA)
- **20-50** = Short-term trends
- **50** = Medium-term (default, recommended)
- **100-200** = Long-term trends
**Impact:** Longer period = slower regime changes, more stable
### Optimization Workflow
**Step 1: Baseline**
- Use all default settings
- Test on 3+ years
- Record: Win Rate, PF, Drawdown
**Step 2: Risk Optimization**
- Test 1%, 1.5%, 2%, 2.5%
- Find best risk-adjusted return
- Balance profit vs drawdown
**Step 3: R:R Optimization**
- Test 2:1, 2.5:1, 3:1
- Check which maximizes profit factor
- Consider holding time
**Step 4: Confluence Optimization**
- Test 1, 2, 3
- Find sweet spot for win rate
- Aim for 55-65% win rate
**Step 5: Regime Filter**
- Test with/without trend filter
- Test with/without chaos filter
- Find what works for your asset
---
## REAL TRADING EXAMPLES
### Example 1: Bull Trending - SPY
**Setup:**
- Regime: BULL TRENDING
- Price pulls back from $450 to $445
- EMA20 at $444
- RSI drops to 45
- Confluence: 4/5
**Entry:**
- Price closes at $445.50 (above EMA20)
- LONG signal appears
- Enter at $445.50
**Risk Management:**
- Stop: $443 (2 ATR = $2.50)
- Target: $451.75 (2.5:1 = $6.25)
- Risk: $2.50 per share
- Position: 80 shares (2% of $10k = $200 risk)
**Outcome:**
- Price rallies to $452 in 3 days
- Target hit
- Profit: $6.50 × 80 = $520
- Return: 2.6 × risk (excellent)
---
### Example 2: Bear Ranging - AAPL
**Setup:**
- Regime: BEAR RANGING
- Range: $165-$175
- Price rallies to $174
- Resistance at $175
- RSI at 68
- Confluence: 3/5
**Entry:**
- Rejection candle at $174
- SHORT signal appears
- Enter at $173.50
**Risk Management:**
- Stop: $176 (above resistance)
- Target: $166 (support)
- Risk: $2.50
- Position: 80 shares
**Outcome:**
- Price drops to $167 in 2 days
- Target hit
- Profit: $6.50 × 80 = $520
- Return: 2.6 × risk
---
### Example 3: Consolidation Breakout - BTC
**Setup:**
- Regime: CONSOLIDATION
- Range: $28,000 - $30,000
- Compressed for 2 weeks
- Volume declining
**Breakout:**
- Price breaks $30,000
- Volume surges 200%
- Close at $30,500
- LONG signal
**Entry:**
- Enter at $30,500
**Risk Management:**
- Stop: $29,500 (back in range)
- Target: $32,000 (range height = $2k)
- Risk: $1,000
- Position: 0.2 BTC ($200 risk on $10k)
**Outcome:**
- Price runs to $33,000
- Target exceeded
- Profit: $2,500 × 0.2 = $500
- Return: 2.5 × risk
---
### Example 4: Avoiding Chaos - Tesla
**Setup:**
- Regime: BULL TRENDING
- LONG position from $240
- Elon tweets something crazy
- Regime changes to CHAOS
**Action:**
- EXIT signal appears
- Close position immediately
- Current price: $242 (small profit)
**Outcome:**
- Next 3 days: wild swings
- High $255, Low $230
- By staying out, avoided:
- Potential stop out
- Whipsaw losses
- Stress
**Result:**
- Small profit preserved
- Capital protected
- Re-enter when regime stabilizes
---
## ALERTS SETUP
### Available Alerts
1. **Bull Trending Regime** - Market goes bullish
2. **Bear Trending Regime** - Market goes bearish
3. **Chaos Regime** - High volatility, stay out
4. **Long Entry Signal** - Buy opportunity
5. **Short Entry Signal** - Sell opportunity
6. **Long Exit Signal** - Close long
7. **Short Exit Signal** - Close short
### How to Set Up
1. Click **⏰ (Alert)** icon in TradingView
2. Select **Condition**: Choose indicator + alert type
3. **Options**: Popup, Email, Webhook, etc.
4. **Message**: Customize notification
5. Click **Create**
### Recommended Alert Strategy
**For Active Traders:**
- Long Entry Signal
- Short Entry Signal
- Long Exit Signal
- Short Exit Signal
**For Position Traders:**
- Bull Trending Regime (enter longs)
- Bear Trending Regime (enter shorts)
- Chaos Regime (exit all)
**For Conservative:**
- Only regime change alerts
- Manually review entries
- More selective
---
## TIPS FOR SUCCESS
### 1. Start Small
- Paper trade first
- Then 0.5% risk
- Build to 1-2% over time
### 2. Follow the Regime
- Don't fight it
- Adapt your style
- Different tactics for each
### 3. Trust the Confluence
- 4-5/5 = Best trades
- 2-3/5 = Good trades
- 1/5 = Skip unless desperate
### 4. Respect Exits
- Don't hope and hold
- Cut losses quickly
- Take profits at targets
### 5. Avoid Chaos
- Seriously, just stay out
- Protect your capital
- Wait for clarity
### 6. Keep a Journal
- Record every trade
- Note regime and confluence
- Review weekly
- Learn patterns
### 7. Backtest Thoroughly
- 3+ years minimum
- Multiple market conditions
- Different assets
- Walk-forward test
### 8. Be Patient
- Best setups are rare
- 1-3 trades per week is normal
- Quality over quantity
- Compound over time
---
## COMMON QUESTIONS
**Q: How many trades per month should I expect?**
A: Depends on timeframe and settings. Daily chart: 5-15 trades/month. 4H chart: 15-30 trades/month.
**Q: What's a good win rate?**
A: 55-65% is excellent. 50-55% is good. Below 50% needs adjustment.
**Q: Should I trade all regimes?**
A: Beginners: Only trending. Intermediate: Trending + ranging. Advanced: All except chaos.
**Q: Can I use this on any timeframe?**
A: Best on Daily and 4H. Works on 1H with more noise. Not recommended <1H.
**Q: What if I'm in a trade and regime changes?**
A: Exit immediately (if using indicator) or let strategy handle it automatically.
**Q: How do I know if I'm over-optimizing?**
A: If results are perfect on one period but fail on another. Use walk-forward testing.
**Q: Should I always take 5/5 confluence trades?**
A: Yes, but they're rare (1-2/month). Don't wait only for these.
**Q: Can I combine this with other indicators?**
A: Yes, but keep it simple. RSI, MACD already included. Maybe add volume profile.
**Q: What assets work best?**
A: Liquid stocks, major crypto, futures. Avoid forex spot (use futures), penny stocks.
**Q: How long to hold positions?**
A: Trending: Days to weeks. Ranging: Hours to days. Breakout: Days. Let the regime guide you.
---
## FINAL THOUGHTS
This system gives you:
- ✅ Clear market context (regime)
- ✅ High-probability entries (confluence)
- ✅ Defined exits (automatic signals)
- ✅ Adaptable tactics (regime-specific)
- ✅ Backtestable results (strategy version)
**Success requires:**
- 📚 Understanding each regime
- 🎯 Following the signals
- 💪 Discipline to wait
- 🧠 Emotional control
- 📊 Proper risk management
**Start your journey:**
1. Load the indicator
2. Watch for 1 week (no trading)
3. Identify regime patterns
4. Paper trade for 1 month
5. Go live with small size
6. Scale up as you gain confidence
**Remember:** The market will always be here. There's no rush. Master one regime at a time, and you'll be profitable in all conditions!
Good luck! 🚀
Wyckoff Method - Comprehensive Analysis# WYCKOFF METHOD - QUICK REFERENCE CHEAT SHEET
## 🟢 STRONGEST BUY SIGNALS
### 1. SPRING ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
- **What:** False breakdown below support on LOW volume
- **Look for:** Quick reversal, close above support
- **Entry:** When price closes back in range
- **Stop:** Below spring low
- **Target:** Top of range minimum
### 2. SOS (Sign of Strength) ⭐⭐⭐⭐
- **What:** Breakout above resistance on HIGH volume
- **Look for:** Wide spread up bar, strong close
- **Entry:** On breakout or wait for LPS pullback
- **Stop:** Below range top
- **Target:** Height of range projected up
### 3. SHAKEOUT ⭐⭐⭐⭐
- **What:** Sharp move below support with HIGH volume, immediate reversal
- **Look for:** Long lower wick, closes strong
- **Entry:** When price reclaims support
- **Stop:** Below shakeout low
- **Target:** Previous resistance
---
## 🔴 STRONGEST SELL SIGNALS
### 1. UTAD (Upthrust After Distribution) ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
- **What:** False breakout above resistance, quick rejection
- **Look for:** Spike high, weak close, often high volume
- **Entry:** When price closes back in range
- **Stop:** Above UTAD high
- **Target:** Bottom of range minimum
### 2. SOW (Sign of Weakness) ⭐⭐⭐⭐
- **What:** Breakdown below support on HIGH volume
- **Look for:** Wide spread down bar, weak close
- **Entry:** On breakdown or wait for LPSY rally
- **Stop:** Above range bottom
- **Target:** Height of range projected down
### 3. UPTHRUST ⭐⭐⭐⭐
- **What:** Move above resistance on LOW volume, weak close
- **Look for:** Long upper wick, closes in lower half
- **Entry:** When resistance holds
- **Stop:** Above upthrust high
- **Target:** Support level
---
## 📊 ACCUMULATION PHASES (Bottom Formation)
```
PHASE A: Stopping the Downtrend
├─ PS (Preliminary Support) - First buying
├─ SC (Selling Climax) - Panic bottom ⚠️ KEY EVENT
├─ AR (Automatic Rally) - Relief bounce
└─ ST (Secondary Test) - Retest SC low
PHASE B: Building the Cause
├─ Trading range forms
├─ Multiple tests of support
├─ Volume decreasing
└─ Absorption occurring
PHASE C: The Test
├─ SPRING - False breakdown ⚠️ KEY EVENT
└─ TEST - Support holds on low volume
PHASE D: Dominance Emerges
├─ SOS - Breakout ⚠️ KEY EVENT
├─ LPS - Last Point of Support (pullback)
└─ BU - Backup
PHASE E: Markup
└─ New uptrend, strong momentum
```
**Background Color:** Blue → Green (getting brighter)
**Action:** Buy in Phase C/D, Hold through Phase E
---
## 📊 DISTRIBUTION PHASES (Top Formation)
```
PHASE A: Stopping the Uptrend
├─ PSY (Preliminary Supply) - First selling
├─ BC (Buying Climax) - Euphoric top ⚠️ KEY EVENT
├─ AR (Automatic Reaction) - Sharp drop
└─ ST (Secondary Test) - Retest BC high
PHASE B: Building the Cause
├─ Trading range forms
├─ Multiple tests of resistance
├─ Demand being absorbed
└─ Volume patterns change
PHASE C: The Test
└─ UTAD - False breakout ⚠️ KEY EVENT
PHASE D: Dominance Emerges
├─ SOW - Breakdown ⚠️ KEY EVENT
└─ LPSY - Last Point of Supply (rally to exit)
PHASE E: Markdown
└─ New downtrend, strong selling
```
**Background Color:** Orange → Red (getting darker)
**Action:** Sell in Phase C/D, Stay out during Phase E
---
## 💰 VOLUME SPREAD ANALYSIS (VSA)
| Signal | Meaning | Color | Implication |
|--------|---------|-------|-------------|
| **ND** (No Demand) | Up bar, LOW volume | 🟠 Orange | Weakness - uptrend ending |
| **NS** (No Supply) | Down bar, LOW volume | 🔵 Blue | Strength - downtrend ending |
| **SV** (Stopping Volume) | VERY HIGH volume, narrow spread | 🟣 Purple | Potential reversal |
| **UT** (Upthrust) | Above resistance, LOW vol, weak close | 🔴 Red | Sell signal |
| **SO** (Shakeout) | Below support, HIGH vol, strong close | 🟢 Green | Buy signal |
---
## 🎯 VOLUME INTERPRETATION
| Volume Level | Bar Color | Meaning |
|--------------|-----------|---------|
| **VERY HIGH** (>2x average) | Dark Green/Red | Climax, potential reversal |
| **HIGH** (>1.5x average) | Light Green/Red | Strong interest |
| **NORMAL** | Gray | Average trading |
| **LOW** (<0.7x average) | Faint Gray | Testing, no interest |
---
## ⚖️ EFFORT vs RESULT
| Scenario | Volume | Spread | Meaning |
|----------|--------|--------|---------|
| **High Effort, Low Result** | HIGH | Narrow | ⚠️ Potential reversal |
| **Low Effort, High Result** | LOW | Wide | ⚠️ Trend weakening |
| **High Effort, High Result** | HIGH | Wide | ✅ Strong trend |
| **Low Effort, Low Result** | LOW | Narrow | 😴 No interest |
---
## 📏 TRADING RULES
### ✅ DO:
- ✅ Wait for confirmation before entering
- ✅ Trade in direction of higher timeframe
- ✅ Use springs and UTAD as primary signals
- ✅ Measure trading range for targets
- ✅ Place stops outside the range
- ✅ Look for volume confirmation
- ✅ Check multiple timeframes
- ✅ Focus on Phase C and D events
### ❌ DON'T:
- ❌ Buy during Phase E Markdown
- ❌ Sell during Phase E Markup
- ❌ Trade against major trend
- ❌ Ignore volume signals
- ❌ Enter without clear stop loss
- ❌ Trade every signal
- ❌ Use on very low timeframes without practice
- ❌ Ignore the context
---
## 🎪 COMPOSITE OPERATOR (Smart Money)
### 💰 Green Money Symbol (Bottom)
- **Meaning:** Institutions accumulating
- **Location:** Demand zones, springs, tests
- **Action:** Follow the smart money - buy
### 💰 Red Money Symbol (Top)
- **Meaning:** Institutions distributing
- **Location:** Supply zones, UTAD, weak rallies
- **Action:** Follow the smart money - sell
---
## 📍 SUPPLY & DEMAND ZONES
### 🟢 Demand Zones (Green Boxes)
- **Created at:** SC, Spring, Shakeout
- **Represents:** Where smart money bought
- **Action:** Look for bounces
### 🔴 Supply Zones (Red Boxes)
- **Created at:** BC, UTAD, Upthrust
- **Represents:** Where smart money sold
- **Action:** Look for rejections
---
## 🎯 TARGET CALCULATION
### Measured Move Method
```
1. Measure trading range height
Example: Top at 120, Bottom at 100 = 20 points
2. Add to breakout point (accumulation)
Breakout at 120 + 20 = Target: 140
3. Or subtract from breakdown (distribution)
Breakdown at 100 - 20 = Target: 80
```
### Multiple Targets
- **Conservative:** 1x range height (100% probability reached)
- **Moderate:** 1.5x range height (70% probability)
- **Aggressive:** 2x range height (40% probability)
---
## ⏰ TIMEFRAME GUIDE
| Timeframe | Use For | Reliability | Recommended For |
|-----------|---------|-------------|-----------------|
| **Weekly** | Major trends | ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ | Position traders |
| **Daily** | Swing trades | ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ | Most traders |
| **4-Hour** | Active swing | ⭐⭐⭐⭐ | Active traders |
| **1-Hour** | Day trading | ⭐⭐⭐ | Experienced only |
| **15-Min** | Scalping | ⭐⭐ | Experts only |
**Golden Rule:** Always check one timeframe higher for context!
---
## 🚨 ALERT PRIORITY
### 🔔 MUST-HAVE ALERTS
1. Spring
2. UTAD
3. SOS
4. SOW
### 🔔 NICE-TO-HAVE ALERTS
5. Selling Climax (SC)
6. Buying Climax (BC)
7. Smart Money Accumulation
8. Smart Money Distribution
### 🔔 CONFIRMATION ALERTS
9. Phase E Markup
10. Phase E Markdown
---
## 💡 QUICK DECISION TREE
```
Is there a clear trading range?
├─ YES
│ ├─ Did price break BELOW support?
│ │ ├─ Volume LOW + Quick reversal = SPRING → BUY ✅
│ │ └─ Volume HIGH + Stays down = Breakdown → SELL ⚠️
│ │
│ └─ Did price break ABOVE resistance?
│ ├─ Volume LOW + Quick reversal = UTAD → SELL ✅
│ └─ Volume HIGH + Stays up = Breakout → BUY ⚠️
│
└─ NO
├─ Strong uptrend = Wait for re-accumulation
└─ Strong downtrend = Wait for re-distribution
```
---
## 📝 PRE-TRADE CHECKLIST
Before entering any trade:
- Identified the current Wyckoff phase
- Confirmed with volume analysis
- Checked higher timeframe trend
- Located supply/demand zones
- Identified clear entry point
- Set stop loss level
- Calculated target (risk:reward >1:2)
- Verified position size (risk 1-2%)
- Have at least 2 confirming signals
- Not trading against major trend
---
## 🧠 REMEMBER
**The Three Laws:**
1. **Supply & Demand** - Price is determined by imbalance
2. **Cause & Effect** - Range size predicts move size
3. **Effort & Result** - Volume should confirm price movement
**The Key Principle:**
> "Trade with the Composite Operator (smart money), not against them"
**Best Setups:**
1. Spring in accumulation (Phase C)
2. UTAD in distribution (Phase C)
3. SOS breakout (Phase D)
4. SOW breakdown (Phase D)
**When in Doubt:**
- ❓ Stay out
- 📈 Use higher timeframe
- 📚 Review the documentation
- 🎯 Wait for clearer signal
---
## 📱 INDICATOR SETTINGS QUICK SETUP
**For Stocks/Crypto (Good Volume Data):**
- Volume MA Length: 20
- High Volume Multiplier: 1.5
- Climax Volume: 2.0
- Swing Length: 5
**For Forex (Limited Volume Data):**
- Volume MA Length: 20
- High Volume Multiplier: 1.3
- Climax Volume: 1.8
- Swing Length: 7
- Turn OFF "Volume Confirmation"
**For Day Trading:**
- Swing Length: 3
- All other settings: Default
**For Position Trading:**
- Swing Length: 7-10
- Volume MA Length: 30
- Use Daily/Weekly charts
---
## 🎓 SKILL PROGRESSION
### Beginner (Month 1-2)
- Focus on: SC, Spring, SOS
- Timeframe: Daily only
- Goal: Identify phases correctly
### Intermediate (Month 3-6)
- Add: All accumulation events
- Timeframe: Daily + 4H
- Goal: Trade springs profitably
### Advanced (Month 6-12)
- Add: Distribution events, VSA
- Timeframe: Multiple timeframes
- Goal: Trade complete cycles
### Expert (Year 2+)
- Master: All events, all timeframes
- Combine: With other methodologies
- Goal: Consistent profitability
---
**Print this sheet and keep it next to your trading desk!**
*Remember: Quality over quantity. Wait for the best setups.*
# Wyckoff Method - Comprehensive Analysis Indicator
## Complete Implementation Guide for TradingView Pine Script
---
## TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. (#overview)
2. (#installation)
3. (#theory)
4. (#components)
5. (#signals)
6. (#strategies)
7. (#settings)
8. (#alerts)
9. (#patterns)
10. (#troubleshooting)
---
## OVERVIEW
This indicator implements Richard Wyckoff's complete trading methodology, including:
- **All 5 Phases** of Accumulation and Distribution
- **18+ Wyckoff Events** (PS, SC, AR, ST, Spring, SOS, LPS, BC, UTAD, SOW, etc.)
- **Volume Spread Analysis (VSA)** principles
- **Supply & Demand Zone** detection
- **Composite Operator** logic (Smart Money tracking)
- **Effort vs Result** analysis
- **Three Wyckoff Laws**: Supply/Demand, Cause/Effect, Effort/Result
---
## INSTALLATION
### Step 1: Copy the Code
1. Open the `wyckoff_comprehensive.pine` file
2. Select all code (Ctrl+A / Cmd+A)
3. Copy to clipboard (Ctrl+C / Cmd+C)
### Step 2: Add to TradingView
1. Go to TradingView.com
2. Open any chart
3. Click "Pine Editor" at the bottom of the screen
4. Click "New" or "Open"
5. Paste the entire code
6. Click "Save" and give it a name
7. Click "Add to Chart"
### Step 3: Verify Installation
You should see:
- Labels on the chart (PS, SC, Spring, SOS, etc.)
- Background colors indicating phases
- Volume analysis in the lower pane
- A table in the top-right corner showing current phase
---
## WYCKOFF METHOD THEORY
### The Three Fundamental Laws
#### 1. **Law of Supply and Demand**
- Price rises when demand exceeds supply
- Price falls when supply exceeds demand
- The indicator tracks volume vs price movement to identify imbalances
#### 2. **Law of Cause and Effect**
- A period of accumulation (cause) leads to markup (effect)
- A period of distribution (cause) leads to markdown (effect)
- Trading ranges build "cause" for future price movement
#### 3. **Law of Effort vs Result**
- **Effort** = Volume (energy put into the market)
- **Result** = Price movement (spread of the bar)
- High effort with low result = potential reversal
- Low effort with high result = trend weakness
### The Five Phases
#### **ACCUMULATION CYCLE**
**Phase A: Stopping the Downtrend**
- Preliminary Support (PS): First sign of buying
- Selling Climax (SC): Panic selling exhaustion
- Automatic Rally (AR): Bounce from SC
- Secondary Test (ST): Test of SC low on lower volume
**Phase B: Building the Cause**
- Trading range develops
- Supply being absorbed by composite operator
- Multiple tests of support and resistance
- Volume generally decreases
**Phase C: The Test (Spring)**
- False breakdown below support
- Traps late sellers
- Quick reversal on low volume
- Last chance to accumulate before markup
**Phase D: Dominance Emerges**
- Sign of Strength (SOS): Break above resistance
- Last Point of Support (LPS): Pullback opportunity
- Backup (BU): Final consolidation
- Demand clearly exceeds supply
**Phase E: Markup**
- New uptrend established
- Price moves rapidly higher
- Phase E can last months/years
- Original trading range becomes support
#### **DISTRIBUTION CYCLE**
**Phase A: Stopping the Uptrend**
- Preliminary Supply (PSY): First sign of selling
- Buying Climax (BC): Euphoric buying exhaustion
- Automatic Reaction (AR): Sharp selloff from BC
- Secondary Test (ST): Test of BC high on lower volume
**Phase B: Building the Cause**
- Trading range at top
- Demand being absorbed by composite operator
- Multiple tests of support and resistance
**Phase C: The Test (UTAD)**
- Upthrust After Distribution
- False breakout above resistance
- Traps late buyers
- Quick reversal
**Phase D: Dominance Emerges**
- Sign of Weakness (SOW): Break below support
- Last Point of Supply (LPSY): Rally opportunity to exit
- Supply clearly exceeds demand
**Phase E: Markdown**
- New downtrend established
- Price moves rapidly lower
- Original trading range becomes resistance
---
## INDICATOR COMPONENTS
### 1. EVENT LABELS
#### Accumulation Events (Green labels)
- **PS** = Preliminary Support
- **SC** = Selling Climax (largest label, most important)
- **AR** = Automatic Rally
- **ST** = Secondary Test
- **SPRING** = Spring (critical buy signal)
- **TEST** = Test of support
- **SOS** = Sign of Strength (breakout)
- **LPS** = Last Point of Support
- **BU** = Backup
#### Distribution Events (Red labels)
- **PSY** = Preliminary Supply
- **BC** = Buying Climax (largest label, most important)
- **AR** = Automatic Reaction
- **ST** = Secondary Test
- **UTAD** = Upthrust After Distribution (critical sell signal)
- **SOW** = Sign of Weakness
- **LPSY** = Last Point of Supply
#### VSA Events (Small colored labels)
- **ND** (Orange) = No Demand - weakness
- **NS** (Blue) = No Supply - strength
- **SV** (Purple) = Stopping Volume
- **UT** (Red) = Upthrust - weakness
- **SO** (Green) = Shakeout - strength
#### Composite Operator (💰 symbols)
- Green 💰 at bottom = Smart Money Accumulation
- Red 💰 at top = Smart Money Distribution
### 2. BACKGROUND COLORS
- **Light Blue** = Phase A (Accumulation)
- **Light Orange** = Phase A (Distribution)
- **Very Light Green** = Phase C (Accumulation Testing)
- **Very Light Red** = Phase C (Distribution Testing)
- **Light Green** = Phase D (Accumulation Strength)
- **Light Red** = Phase D (Distribution Weakness)
- **Green** = Phase E (Markup - Bull trend)
- **Red** = Phase E (Markdown - Bear trend)
### 3. SUPPLY & DEMAND ZONES
- **Green boxes** = Demand zones (where smart money accumulated)
- **Red boxes** = Supply zones (where smart money distributed)
- Zones extend 20 bars into the future
- Price reactions at these zones are significant
### 4. VOLUME PANEL
- **Dark Green/Red bars** = Very High Volume (climax)
- **Light Green/Red bars** = High Volume
- **Gray bars** = Normal Volume
- **Faint Gray bars** = Low Volume
- **Blue line** = Volume Moving Average
### 5. INFORMATION TABLE (Top Right)
Displays real-time analysis:
- **Current Phase** (A, B, C, D, or E)
- **Status** (description of what's happening)
- **Volume** (Very High, High, Normal, Low)
- **Spread** (Wide, Normal, Narrow)
- **Effort/Result** (Poor, Normal, Good)
- **Range** (YES if in trading range)
- **Bias** (BULLISH, BEARISH, or NEUTRAL)
---
## HOW TO READ THE SIGNALS
### STRONG BUY SIGNALS (in order of strength)
1. **SPRING** (strongest)
- False breakdown below support
- Look for: Low volume, quick reversal, close above support
- Entry: When price closes back above support level
- Stop: Below the spring low
2. **SOS (Sign of Strength)**
- Break above trading range resistance
- Look for: High volume, wide spread up bar
- Entry: On breakout or pullback to LPS
- Stop: Below trading range
3. **Shakeout (SO)**
- Similar to spring but more violent
- Look for: High volume, penetration of support, strong close
- Entry: When price reclaims support
- Stop: Below shakeout low
4. **LPS (Last Point of Support)**
- Pullback after SOS
- Look for: Low volume, shallow pullback
- Entry: When support holds
- Stop: Below LPS
5. **No Supply (NS)**
- Down bar on very low volume
- Indicates lack of selling pressure
- Confirms accumulation phase
### STRONG SELL SIGNALS (in order of strength)
1. **UTAD (Upthrust After Distribution)** (strongest)
- False breakout above resistance
- Look for: High volume spike, rejection, close below resistance
- Entry: When price closes back below resistance
- Stop: Above UTAD high
2. **SOW (Sign of Weakness)**
- Break below trading range support
- Look for: High volume, wide spread down bar
- Entry: On breakdown or rally to LPSY
- Stop: Above trading range
3. **Upthrust (UT)**
- Move above resistance on low volume, weak close
- Look for: Low volume, close in lower half of bar
- Entry: When resistance becomes resistance again
- Stop: Above upthrust high
4. **LPSY (Last Point of Supply)**
- Rally after SOW
- Look for: Low volume, weak rally
- Entry: When rally fails
- Stop: Above LPSY
5. **No Demand (ND)**
- Up bar on very low volume
- Indicates lack of buying pressure
- Confirms distribution phase
### NEUTRAL/WARNING SIGNALS
- **High Effort, Low Result** = Potential reversal coming
- **Stopping Volume** = Trend may be ending
- **Absorption** = Large volume with small movement (accumulation/distribution)
---
## TRADING STRATEGY EXAMPLES
### Strategy 1: Accumulation Range Breakout
**Setup:**
1. Identify trading range (blue background in Phase B)
2. Wait for Spring or Test (Phase C)
3. Wait for SOS breakout (Phase D)
**Entry:**
- Option A: Buy on SOS breakout
- Option B: Wait for LPS pullback (better risk/reward)
**Stop Loss:**
- Below the spring low or trading range bottom
**Target:**
- Measure height of trading range (cause)
- Project upward from breakout point (effect)
- Minimum target = range height
**Example:**
```
Trading Range: 100 to 120 (20 point range)
SOS Breakout at: 120
Target: 120 + 20 = 140 minimum
```
### Strategy 2: Distribution Range Breakdown
**Setup:**
1. Identify trading range after uptrend
2. Wait for UTAD (Phase C)
3. Wait for SOW breakdown (Phase D)
**Entry:**
- Option A: Sell on SOW breakdown
- Option B: Wait for LPSY rally (better risk/reward)
**Stop Loss:**
- Above the UTAD high or trading range top
**Target:**
- Measure height of trading range
- Project downward from breakdown point
- Minimum target = range height
### Strategy 3: Spring Trading
**Setup:**
1. Strong downtrend followed by range
2. Price breaks below range bottom
3. Volume is LOW on breakdown
4. Price quickly reverses and closes above support
**Entry:**
- When candle closes above support level
- Or on retest of support
**Stop Loss:**
- Below spring low (usually tight)
**Target:**
- Top of trading range
- Previous swing high
**Risk/Reward:**
- Typically 1:3 or better
### Strategy 4: Smart Money Tracking
**Setup:**
1. Look for 💰 symbols in demand zones
2. Multiple accumulation signals (PS, SC, ST, Test)
3. Volume decreasing during range
**Entry:**
- At next demand zone test
- On SOS breakout
**Confirmation:**
- Background turning green (Phase D/E)
- Table shows "BULLISH" bias
### Strategy 5: VSA Reversal
**Setup:**
1. Strong trend in place
2. Stopping Volume (SV) appears at extreme
3. Followed by No Demand (ND) or No Supply (NS)
**Entry:**
- When trend breaks down/up
- On retest of extreme
**Example (Bullish):**
```
Downtrend → Stopping Volume → No Supply → Up bar
Entry: Buy when price moves above SV bar
```
---
## SETTINGS & CUSTOMIZATION
### Volume Analysis Settings
**Volume MA Length** (default: 20)
- Shorter = More sensitive to volume changes
- Longer = Smoother, less noise
- Recommended: 15-25 for most timeframes
**High Volume Multiplier** (default: 1.5)
- Threshold for "high volume"
- Lower = More signals
- Higher = Only extreme volume
- Recommended: 1.3-2.0
**Climax Volume Multiplier** (default: 2.0)
- Threshold for climax events (SC, BC)
- Should be significantly higher than normal
- Recommended: 2.0-3.0
### Phase Detection Settings
**Swing Detection Length** (default: 5)
- How many bars to look left/right for swing points
- Shorter = More swings detected (more noise)
- Longer = Fewer swings (cleaner, might miss some)
- Recommended: 3-7
**Range Expansion Threshold** (default: 1.5)
- Multiplier for "wide spread" bars
- Higher = Only very wide bars qualify
- Recommended: 1.3-2.0
**Volume Confirmation** (default: ON)
- Requires volume confirmation for events
- Turn OFF for very low volume instruments
- Keep ON for stocks, forex, crypto
### Display Options
Toggle on/off:
- ✅ **Show Accumulation/Distribution Phases** - Background colors
- ✅ **Show Wyckoff Events** - All labeled events
- ✅ **Show Volume Spread Analysis** - VSA labels
- ✅ **Show Supply/Demand Zones** - Boxes on chart
- ✅ **Show Composite Operator Signals** - 💰 symbols
### Color Customization
- **Bullish Color** - All accumulation events
- **Bearish Color** - All distribution events
- **Neutral Color** - Range/neutral signals
---
## ALERT SETUP
### Available Alerts
1. **Selling Climax (SC)** - Potential bottom forming
2. **Spring** - Strong buy signal
3. **Sign of Strength (SOS)** - Bullish breakout
4. **Buying Climax (BC)** - Potential top forming
5. **UTAD** - Strong sell signal
6. **Sign of Weakness (SOW)** - Bearish breakdown
7. **Phase E Markup** - Uptrend confirmed
8. **Phase E Markdown** - Downtrend confirmed
9. **Smart Money Accumulation** - Institutions buying
10. **Smart Money Distribution** - Institutions selling
### How to Set Up Alerts
1. Click the "⏰" icon on TradingView
2. Select "Create Alert"
3. Condition: Choose the indicator and alert type
4. Example: "Wyckoff Method - Spring"
5. Set notification preferences (popup, email, webhook)
6. Click "Create"
### Recommended Alert Strategy
**Conservative Trader:**
- Spring
- SOS
- UTAD
- SOW
**Aggressive Trader:**
- Add: SC, BC, Smart Money signals
**Long-term Investor:**
- Phase E Markup
- Phase E Markdown
- Smart Money Accumulation
---
## COMMON PATTERNS
### Pattern 1: Classic Accumulation
```
Phase A: Downtrend → PS → SC → AR → ST
Phase B: Range building (4-12 weeks typical)
Phase C: Spring (false breakdown)
Phase D: SOS → LPS → BU
Phase E: Markup (new uptrend)
```
**What to do:**
- Mark the range boundaries
- Wait for spring
- Buy on LPS or SOS
- Hold through markup
### Pattern 2: Classic Distribution
```
Phase A: Uptrend → PSY → BC → AR → ST
Phase B: Range building (topping process)
Phase C: UTAD (false breakout)
Phase D: SOW → LPSY
Phase E: Markdown (new downtrend)
```
**What to do:**
- Mark the range boundaries
- Wait for UTAD
- Sell on LPSY or SOW
- Stay out during markdown
### Pattern 3: Re-Accumulation
```
Uptrend → Trading Range → Spring → Uptrend continues
```
- Occurs during existing uptrend
- Shorter accumulation period
- Often no clear SC (trend is already up)
- Spring is the key signal
### Pattern 4: Re-Distribution
```
Downtrend → Trading Range → UTAD → Downtrend continues
```
- Occurs during existing downtrend
- Shorter distribution period
- Often no clear BC (trend is already down)
- UTAD is the key signal
### Pattern 5: Failed Breakout
**Bullish Failed Breakout:**
```
Range → Breakdown → Immediate reversal (Spring)
```
- Price breaks support
- Volume is LOW
- Immediate strong reversal
- Very bullish
**Bearish Failed Breakout:**
```
Range → Breakout → Immediate reversal (UTAD)
```
- Price breaks resistance
- Volume may be high initially
- Quick rejection and reversal
- Very bearish
---
## TIMEFRAME RECOMMENDATIONS
### Daily Charts (Most Reliable)
- Best for swing trading
- Clear phases and events
- Less noise
- Recommended for beginners
### 4-Hour Charts
- Good for active swing traders
- Faster signals than daily
- Still reliable
### 1-Hour Charts
- For day traders
- More false signals
- Need to filter carefully
- Use in conjunction with higher timeframe
### 15-Minute / 5-Minute
- Only for experienced traders
- High noise level
- Many false signals
- Use daily chart for context
**Golden Rule:** Always check higher timeframe first!
---
## MULTI-TIMEFRAME ANALYSIS
### Top-Down Approach (Recommended)
1. **Weekly Chart** - Identify major trend and phase
2. **Daily Chart** - Find current accumulation/distribution
3. **4H Chart** - Identify entry timing
4. **Entry Timeframe** - Execute trade
### Example Analysis:
**Weekly:** Phase E Markup (bullish)
**Daily:** Phase B Re-accumulation
**4-Hour:** Spring detected
**Action:** Buy on daily LPS
---
## WYCKOFF + OTHER INDICATORS
### Complementary Tools
1. **Moving Averages**
- 20/50 SMA for trend context
- Already plotted on indicator
2. **RSI**
- Divergences at SC/BC
- Confirms overbought/oversold
3. **MACD**
- Confirms trend change in Phase D
- Divergences support Wyckoff events
4. **Volume Profile**
- Identifies value areas
- Confirms supply/demand zones
5. **Order Flow / Footprint Charts**
- See institutional activity
- Confirms smart money signals
**Don't Over-Complicate:**
- Wyckoff is a complete system
- Other indicators are supplementary
- When in doubt, trust Wyckoff
---
## TROUBLESHOOTING
### Issue: Too Many Labels
**Solution:**
- Increase swing length (Settings → 7 or 10)
- Increase volume multipliers
- Turn off VSA labels if not needed
- Focus on major events only (SC, Spring, SOS, BC, UTAD, SOW)
### Issue: Missing Expected Events
**Solution:**
- Decrease swing length (Settings → 3)
- Decrease volume multipliers
- Turn OFF volume confirmation
- Check timeframe (use daily chart)
### Issue: False Signals
**Solution:**
- Use higher timeframe
- Wait for confirmation
- Don't trade against major trend
- Look for multiple signal convergence
### Issue: Can't See Background Colors
**Solution:**
- Check "Show Phases" is enabled
- Increase monitor brightness
- Colors are subtle by design (not to obscure price)
### Issue: Volume Shows Incorrectly
**Solution:**
- Ensure volume data is available for your symbol
- Some symbols have poor volume data
- Forex spot pairs have no real volume
- Use futures or stock markets for best results
### Issue: No Trading Range Detected
**Solution:**
- Market may be trending strongly
- Trading range might be too small
- Wait for price to consolidate
- Not all markets have clear ranges
---
## ADVANCED TIPS
### 1. Count Point & Figure Charts
- Wyckoff used P&F to measure "cause"
- Width of range × height = minimum move target
- Longer accumulation = larger markup
### 2. Watch for Absorption
- High volume + narrow spread = someone absorbing
- In downtrend = accumulation
- In uptrend = distribution
### 3. Multiple Timeframe Springs
- Spring on daily + spring on weekly = very strong
- Increases probability significantly
### 4. Failed Signals Are Signals Too
- Failed spring = weakness, expect lower
- Failed UTAD = strength, expect higher
### 5. Context is King
- Don't buy during Phase E Markdown
- Don't sell during Phase E Markup
- Respect the major trend
### 6. Volume Precedes Price
- Study volume changes first
- Price follows volume
- Decreasing volume in range = building energy
### 7. Composite Operator Mindset
- Think like institutions
- Where would smart money buy/sell?
- They need liquidity (retail traders)
---
## RISK MANAGEMENT
### Position Sizing
**Conservative:**
- Risk 1% per trade
- Wider stops at range boundaries
**Moderate:**
- Risk 1-2% per trade
- Stops below spring/above UTAD
**Aggressive:**
- Risk 2-3% per trade
- Tight stops
- Higher win rate needed
### Stop Loss Placement
**Accumulation:**
- Below spring low
- Below trading range bottom
- Below demand zone
**Distribution:**
- Above UTAD high
- Above trading range top
- Above supply zone
### Take Profit Strategy
**Method 1: Measured Move**
- Range height = minimum target
- 2x range height = extended target
**Method 2: Fibonacci Extensions**
- 1.0 = range height
- 1.618 = extended target
- 2.618 = maximum target
**Method 3: Trail the Stop**
- Move stop to breakeven at 1R
- Trail under swing lows in markup
- Lock in profits progressively
---
## BACKTESTING CHECKLIST
Before trading with real money:
- Backtest on 50+ historical examples
- Record all signals in trading journal
- Calculate win rate (aim for >50%)
- Calculate average R:R (aim for >1:2)
- Test on multiple instruments
- Test on multiple timeframes
- Test in different market conditions
- Verify signal consistency
- Practice on demo account
- Start small with real money
---
## RECOMMENDED READING
### Books
1. **"Studies in Tape Reading"** - Richard D. Wyckoff
2. **"The Richard D. Wyckoff Method"** - Rubén Villahermosa
3. **"Charting the Stock Market: The Wyckoff Method"** - Jack Hutson
4. **"Master the Markets"** - Tom Williams (VSA)
### Courses
1. Wyckoff Analytics - Official Wyckoff course
2. TradeVSA - Volume Spread Analysis
3. StockCharts - Wyckoff education
### Communities
1. Wyckoff Analytics Forum
2. Reddit r/Wyckoff
3. TradingView Wyckoff ideas section
---
## FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
**Q: Can I use this on crypto?**
A: Yes, works well on major cryptocurrencies with good volume.
**Q: Does it work on forex?**
A: Yes, but use futures volume (like 6E for EUR/USD) for better accuracy.
**Q: What's the best timeframe?**
A: Daily chart for most traders. 4H for more active trading.
**Q: How long does accumulation last?**
A: Typically 2-12 weeks. Longer accumulation = bigger markup.
**Q: Can I automate this?**
A: You can use the alerts, but manual analysis is recommended.
**Q: What's the win rate?**
A: With proper filtering: 60-70% on major signals (Spring, UTAD, SOS, SOW).
**Q: Should I trade every signal?**
A: No. Focus on Spring, UTAD, SOS, and SOW in trending markets.
**Q: What if I see conflicting signals?**
A: Use higher timeframe for context. When in doubt, stay out.
**Q: How do I know which phase I'm in?**
A: Check the table in top-right corner. Also look at background color.
**Q: Can I use this for options trading?**
A: Yes, excellent for timing option entries (especially around Spring/UTAD).
---
## FINAL THOUGHTS
The Wyckoff Method is:
- **A complete trading system** (not just an indicator)
- **Based on 100+ years** of market wisdom
- **Used by institutions** and professional traders
- **Requires practice** and screen time
- **Highly effective** when applied correctly
**Success Tips:**
1. Start with daily charts
2. Focus on major events (SC, Spring, SOS, BC, UTAD, SOW)
3. Always check higher timeframe context
4. Wait for confirmation before entering
5. Manage risk properly
6. Keep a trading journal
7. Be patient - wait for the best setups
**Remember:**
- Not every range will have all events
- Some phases may be abbreviated
- Context and confluence matter most
- Practice makes perfect
---
## SUPPORT & UPDATES
For questions, improvements, or bug reports:
- Check TradingView script comments
- Join Wyckoff trading communities
- Study historical examples
- Practice on demo accounts
**Good luck and happy trading!**
---
*Disclaimer: This indicator is for educational purposes. Always do your own analysis and risk management. Past performance does not guarantee future results.*
# WYCKOFF VISUAL SETUP EXAMPLES
## ACCUMULATION SCHEMATIC #1 (Classic Bottom)
```
Price Chart View:
│ PHASE E
│ MARKUP
│ ╱
│ ╱
┌─SOS─────┤ ╱
│ │ ╱
┌───────────┤ ┌LPS │╱
│ PHASE B │ │ │
│ (Cause) └──┴──────┤
┌AR──┤ │
┌────┤ │ ┌─Spring │ PHASE D
│ └ST──┤ │ │
│ │ │ │
────SC────────┴─────────┴───────────┴──────────
│
PS
│ PHASE A
│
Downtrend
```
### PHASE A - Stopping the Downtrend
```
PS: │ High volume down bar
▼ First sign of support
■ Not bottom yet
SC: │ VERY HIGH volume
▼ Panic selling exhaustion
█ Long lower wick
█ This is the low
AR: │ Automatic rally
▲ Relief bounce
■ High volume acceptable
ST: │ Secondary test
▼ Low volume (KEY!)
■ Tests SC low
```
### PHASE B - Building the Cause
```
┌─────────┐
│ ~~~ │ Multiple tests
│ ~ ~ │ Volume decreases
│~ ~ │ Range gets tighter
└─────────┘
Duration: 2-12 weeks typical
The longer, the bigger the eventual move
```
### PHASE C - The Test (SPRING)
```
║ False breakdown
─────╨─────
▼ Low volume
█ Breaks below support
■
█ Quick reversal
▲ Closes ABOVE support
CRITICAL: Volume must be LOW
Close must be strong
Happens quickly (1-3 bars)
```
### PHASE D - Strength Emerges
```
SOS: ▲ Sign of Strength
────╥──── Break above resistance
║ High volume
║ Wide spread
LPS: ▼ Last Point Support
■ Pullback on LOW volume
▲ Great entry point
BU: ▲ Backup
■ Final consolidation
▲ Before markup
```
### PHASE E - Markup
```
╱
╱
╱ Strong uptrend
╱ High momentum
╱ Can last months/years
──╱──
```
---
## DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATIC #2 (Classic Top)
```
Price Chart View:
Uptrend
│
PSY
│ PHASE A
────BC────────┬─────────┬───────────┬──────────
│ │ UTAD │
│ PHASE B │ │ PHASE D
┌AR──┤ ┌LPSY │ │
│ │ │ └───────────┤
│ └──┴──────┐ │╲
└ST──┤ │ │ ╲
│ └───────────┤ ╲
└─SOW─────┤ │ ╲
│ │ ╲
│ PHASE C │ ╲
│ │ PHASE E
│ │ MARKDOWN
```
### PHASE A - Stopping the Uptrend
```
PSY: │ High volume up bar
▲ Preliminary supply
■ Selling starting
BC: │ VERY HIGH volume
▲ Buying climax
█ Euphoric top
█ Long upper wick
AR: │ Automatic reaction
▼ Sharp selloff
■ High volume
ST: │ Secondary test
▲ Low volume (KEY!)
■ Tests BC high
```
### PHASE C - The Test (UTAD)
```
▲ False breakout
────╥────
║ Breaks ABOVE resistance
║ Often high volume spike
▼
█ Rejection / weak close
█ Closes BELOW resistance
▼
CRITICAL: Closes weak
Quick rejection
Traps buyers
```
### PHASE D - Weakness Emerges
```
SOW: ▼ Sign of Weakness
────╨──── Break below support
║ High volume
║ Wide spread
LPSY: ▲ Last Point Supply
■ Rally on LOW volume
▼ Last chance to exit
```
---
## VOLUME PATTERNS (Critical to Understanding)
### ACCUMULATION Volume Pattern
```
Volume
│ SC
█
█ ST
■ ■ Spring
■ ■ ■ SOS LPS
──┴────┴────┴──────█───■────►
│ │ │ │ │
│ │ │ │ │
A A C D D
Pattern: HIGH → low → low → HIGH → low
Key: Volume DECREASES during range
INCREASES on breakout
```
### DISTRIBUTION Volume Pattern
```
Volume
│ BC
█
█ ST
■ ■ UTAD
■ ■ ■ SOW LPSY
──┴────┴────┴──────█───■────►
│ │ │ │ │
│ │ │ │ │
A A C D D
Pattern: HIGH → low → varies → HIGH → low
Key: Volume MAY increase on UTAD
Definitely HIGH on breakdown (SOW)
```
---
## REAL TRADE SETUPS
### Setup #1: SPRING BUY
```
Entry Conditions:
1. Clear trading range identified
2. Price breaks BELOW support
3. Volume is LOW (critical!)
4. Price reverses QUICKLY
5. Closes ABOVE support level
Entry: Next bar or on retest
Stop: Below spring low
Target: Top of range (minimum)
Example:
Support: $100
Spring low: $98 (low volume)
Close: $101
Entry: $102
Stop: $97.50
Target: $120 (range top)
Risk/Reward: 1:4
```
### Setup #2: UTAD SELL
```
Entry Conditions:
1. Clear trading range identified (after uptrend)
2. Price breaks ABOVE resistance
3. Often high volume spike
4. Price reverses QUICKLY
5. Closes BELOW resistance level
Entry: Next bar or on retest
Stop: Above UTAD high
Target: Bottom of range (minimum)
Example:
Resistance: $200
UTAD high: $205 (spike)
Close: $198
Entry: $197
Stop: $206
Target: $180 (range bottom)
Risk/Reward: 1:2
```
### Setup #3: SOS BREAKOUT
```
Entry Conditions:
1. Clear accumulation range
2. Spring already occurred (ideal)
3. Price breaks ABOVE resistance
4. HIGH volume on breakout
5. Wide spread up bar
Entry Option A: On breakout ($120)
Entry Option B: Wait for LPS pullback ($115)
Stop: Below range or LPS
Target: Range height projected up
Example:
Range: $100-$120 (20 points)
SOS breakout: $120
Entry A: $120
Stop: $115
Target 1: $140 (100%)
Target 2: $150 (150%)
```
---
## VSA SPECIFIC PATTERNS
### Pattern 1: No Demand (Weakness)
```
▲
■ Up bar
■ Low volume ◄── KEY
▲ Small body
Context: After uptrend
Meaning: Buyers exhausted
Action: Prepare to sell
```
### Pattern 2: No Supply (Strength)
```
▼
■ Down bar
■ Low volume ◄── KEY
▼ Small body
Context: After downtrend
Meaning: Sellers exhausted
Action: Prepare to buy
```
### Pattern 3: Stopping Volume
```
═ Very high volume
█ Narrow spread ◄── KEY
═ Price not moving
Context: At extremes
Meaning: Absorption
Action: Expect reversal
```
---
## COMMON MISTAKES (What NOT to Do)
### ❌ Mistake 1: Buying Prematurely
```
WRONG:
SC
▼
█ ← DON'T BUY HERE
CORRECT:
Spring
─────╨─────
▼
█ ← BUY HERE
▲
```
### ❌ Mistake 2: Ignoring Volume
```
WRONG: "It broke below support, must be spring"
─────╨───── High volume
█
This is a BREAKDOWN, not a spring!
CORRECT Spring:
─────╨───── LOW volume ✓
■ Quick reversal ✓
▲
```
### ❌ Mistake 3: Trading Against Trend
```
WRONG:
Markdown Phase E
╲
╲ ← Trying to buy here
╲
╲
CORRECT:
Wait for new accumulation to complete
```
---
## MULTI-TIMEFRAME EXAMPLE
### Weekly Chart: Phase E Markup (Bullish)
```
╱
╱
╱ Long-term uptrend
╱
───╱─────
```
### Daily Chart: Re-Accumulation Phase C
```
┌─────────┐
│ Spring │ ← We are here
│ ▼ │
─────┴────█────┴─────
▲
```
### 4-Hour Chart: Entry Timing
```
Last 48 hours:
─────╨───── Spring occurred
█
▲ ← Enter now
■
```
**Result:** Triple confirmation across timeframes = High probability trade
---
## PROFIT TARGETS (Visual Guide)
### Method 1: Basic Measured Move
```
Resistance: 120 ┐ ─────────
│
│ 20 points
│
Support: 100 ┘ ─────────
Breakout: 120
Target: 120 + 20 = 140
╱╱╱ 140 (Target)
╱╱╱
╱╱╱
──────◄ 120 (Breakout)
│
Range │ 20
│
──────┘ 100
```
### Method 2: Multiple Targets
```
╱╱╱ 150 (Target 3: 2.5x) - 20% position
╱╱╱
╱╱╱ 140 (Target 2: 2x) - 30% position
╱╱╱
─────◄╱ 130 (Target 1: 1x) - 50% position
│
10 │ 120 (Breakout)
│
─────┘ 110 (Support)
```
### Method 3: Trailing Stop
```
1. Move stop to breakeven at Target 1
2. Trail stop under swing lows
3. Let winners run
╱╱╱
╱ ╱╱ ← Trail stop here
╱╱ ╱
╱ ╱ ← Then here
─────◄──╱
← Start here (breakeven)
```
---
## TIMING ENTRIES (Exact Bar Patterns)
### Perfect Spring Entry
```
Bar 1: ▼ Breaks below (Low vol)
█
Bar 2: ▲ Reverses (Closes strong)
█ ◄─ ENTER HERE
Bar 3: ■ Confirms
▲
DON'T WAIT for Bar 3!
Enter on Bar 2 close
```
### Perfect UTAD Entry
```
Bar 1: ▲ Breaks above (Spike vol OK)
█
Bar 2: ▼ Reverses (Closes weak)
█ ◄─ ENTER HERE
Bar 3: ■ Confirms
▼
SHORT on Bar 2 close
Don't wait for more confirmation
```
---
## COMPOSITE OPERATOR PSYCHOLOGY
### What Smart Money Does (Follow Them)
**Accumulation:**
```
1. Create fear (PS, SC)
2. Shake out weak hands (Spring)
3. Absorb supply quietly (Phase B)
4. Test for remaining supply (Test)
5. Mark it up (SOS → Phase E)
💰 They buy LOW when retail panics
```
**Distribution:**
```
1. Create euphoria (PSY, BC)
2. Trap late buyers (UTAD)
3. Distribute to buyers (Phase B)
4. Test for remaining demand (ST)
5. Mark it down (SOW → Phase E)
💰 They sell HIGH when retail buys
```
### Where to Look for Smart Money
```
💰 Buy signals appear at:
- Demand zones (green boxes)
- Springs and shakeouts
- Tests of support
- After selling climax
💰 Sell signals appear at:
- Supply zones (red boxes)
- UTAD and upthrusts
- Weak rallies (LPSY)
- After buying climax
```
---
## PRACTICE EXERCISES
### Exercise 1: Identify the Phase
Look at any chart and ask:
1. Is there a trading range? (Phase B likely)
2. Did we just stop a trend? (Phase A)
3. Was there a spring/UTAD? (Phase C)
4. Is there a breakout? (Phase D)
5. Is trend running? (Phase E)
### Exercise 2: Volume Analysis
For each bar, note:
- Volume level (High/Normal/Low)
- Spread (Wide/Normal/Narrow)
- Effort vs Result (Matching? Diverging?)
### Exercise 3: Find Historical Springs
Go back 6 months:
- Mark all springs you can find
- Note the setup before each
- Track what happened after
- Calculate win rate
---
## FINAL VISUALIZATION: The Complete Cycle
```
ACCUMULATION → MARKUP → DISTRIBUTION → MARKDOWN → ACCUMULATION...
Distribution Accumulation
(Top) (Bottom)
┌───────────────┐ ┌───────────────┐
│ BC UTAD │ │ Spring SC │
│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │
────┴───┴───┴───────┴─╲ ╱────────┴───┴───┴────
╲ ╱
Markdown ╲ ╱ Markup
(Phase E) ╲ ╱ (Phase E)
╲ ╱
╲ ╱
╲ ╱
╲ ╱
V
The market cycles endlessly
Your job: Identify where you are in the cycle
Trade accordingly
```
---
**Remember:**
- 📊 Study charts daily
- 📝 Journal every setup
- 🎯 Wait for the best signals
- 💰 Follow smart money
- ⏰ Be patient
- 🚀 Let winners run
**The indicator does the heavy lifting - you make the decisions!**
Luxy Super-Duper SuperTrend Predictor Engine and Buy/Sell signalA professional trend-following grading system that analyzes historical trend
patterns to provide statistical duration estimates using advanced similarity
matching and k-nearest neighbors analysis. Combines adaptive Supertrend with
intelligent duration statistics, multi-timeframe confluence, volume confirmation,
and quality scoring to identify high-probability setups with data-driven
target ranges across all timeframes.
Note: All duration estimates are statistical calculations based on historical data, not guarantees of future performance.
WHAT MAKES THIS DIFFERENT
Unlike traditional SuperTrend indicators that only tell you trend direction, this system answers the critical question: "What is the typical duration for trends like this?"
The Statistical Analysis Engine:
• Analyzes your chart's last 15+ completed SuperTrend trends (bullish and bearish separately)
• Uses k-nearest neighbors similarity matching to find historically similar setups
• Calculates statistical duration estimates based on current market conditions
• Learns from estimation errors and adapts over time (Advanced mode)
• Displays visual duration analysis box showing median, average, and range estimates
• Tracks Statistical accuracy with backtest statistics
Complete Trading System:
• Statistical trend duration analysis with three intelligence levels
• Adaptive Supertrend with dynamic ATR-based bands
• Multi-timeframe confluence analysis (6 timeframes: 5M to 1W)
• Volume confirmation with spike detection and momentum tracking
• Quality scoring system (0-70 points) rating each setup
• One-click preset optimization for all trading styles
• Anti-repaint guarantee on all signals and duration estimates
METHODOLOGY CREDITS
This indicator's approach is inspired by proven trading methodologies from respected market educators:
• Mark Minervini - Volatility Contraction Pattern (VCP) and pullback entry techniques
• William O'Neil - Volume confirmation principles and institutional buying patterns (CANSLIM methodology)
• Dan Zanger - Volatility expansion entries and momentum breakout strategies
Important: These are educational references only. This indicator does not guarantee any specific trading results. Always conduct your own analysis and risk management.
KEY FEATURES
1. TREND DURATION ANALYSIS SYSTEM - The Core Innovation
The statistical analysis engine is what sets this indicator apart from standard SuperTrend systems. It doesn't just identify trend changes - it provides statistical analysis of potential duration.
How It Works:
Step 1: Historical Tracking
• Automatically records every completed SuperTrend trend (duration in bars)
• Maintains separate databases for bullish trends and bearish trends
• Stores up to 15 most recent trends of each type
• Captures market conditions at each trend flip: volume ratio, ATR ratio, quality score, price distance from SuperTrend, proximity to support/resistance
Step 2: Similarity Matching (k-Nearest Neighbors)
• When new trend begins, system compares current conditions to ALL historical flips
• Calculates similarity score based on:
- Volume similarity (30% weight) - Is volume behaving similarly?
- Volatility similarity (30% weight) - Is ATR/volatility similar?
- Quality similarity (20% weight) - Is setup strength comparable?
- Distance similarity (10% weight) - Is price distance from ST similar?
- Support/Resistance proximity (10% weight) - Similar structural context?
• Selects the 15 MOST SIMILAR historical trends (not just all trends)
• This is like asking: "When conditions looked like this before, how long did trends last?"
Step 3: Statistical Analysis
• Calculates median duration (most common outcome)
• Calculates average duration (mean of similar trends)
• Determines realistic range (min to max of similar trends)
• Applies exponential weighting (recent trends weighted more heavily)
• Outputs confidence-weighted statistical estimate
Step 4: Advanced Intelligence (Advanced Mode Only)
The Advanced mode applies five sophisticated multipliers to refine estimates:
A) Market Structure Multiplier (±30%):
• Detects nearby support/resistance levels using pivot detection
• If flip occurs NEAR a key level: Estimate adjusted -30% (expect bounce/rejection)
• If flip occurs in open space: Estimate adjusted +30% (clear path for continuation)
• Uses configurable lookback period and ATR-based proximity threshold
B) Asset Type Multiplier (±40%):
• Adjusts duration estimates based on asset volatility characteristics
• Small Cap / Biotech: +40% (explosive, extended moves)
• Tech Growth: +20% (momentum-driven, longer trends)
• Blue Chip / Large Cap: 0% (baseline, steady trends)
• Dividend / Value: -20% (slower, grinding trends)
• Cyclical: Variable based on macro regime
• Crypto / High Volatility: +30% (parabolic potential)
C) Flip Strength Multiplier (±20%):
• Analyzes the QUALITY of the trend flip itself
• Strong flip (high volume + expanding ATR + quality score 60+): +20%
• Weak flip (low volume + contracting ATR + quality score under 40): -20%
• Logic: Historical data shows that powerful flips tend to be followed by longer trends
D) Error Learning Multiplier (±15%):
• Tracks Statistical accuracy over last 10 completed trends
• Calculates error ratio: (estimated duration / Actual Duration)
• If system consistently over-estimates: Apply -15% correction
• If system consistently under-estimates: Apply +15% correction
• Learns and adapts to current market regime
E) Regime Detection Multiplier (±20%):
• Analyzes last 3 trends of SAME TYPE (bull-to-bull or bear-to-bear)
• Compares recent trend durations to historical average
• If recent trends 20%+ longer than average: +20% adjustment (trending regime detected)
• If recent trends 20%+ shorter than average: -20% adjustment (choppy regime detected)
• Detects whether market is in trending or mean-reversion mode
Three analysis modes:
SIMPLE MODE - Basic Statistics
• Uses raw median of similar trends only
• No multipliers, no adjustments
• Best for: Beginners, clean trending markets
• Fastest calculations, minimal complexity
STANDARD MODE - Full Statistical Analysis
• Similarity matching with k-nearest neighbors
• Exponential weighting of recent trends
• Median, average, and range calculations
• Best for: Most traders, general market conditions
• Balance of accuracy and simplicity
ADVANCED MODE - Statistics + Intelligence
• Everything in Standard mode PLUS
• All 5 advanced multipliers (structure, asset type, flip strength, learning, regime)
• Highest Statistical accuracy in testing
• Best for: Experienced traders, volatile/complex markets
• Maximum intelligence, most adaptive
Visual Duration Analysis Box:
When a new trend begins (SuperTrend flip), a box appears on your chart showing:
• Analysis Mode (Simple / Standard / Advanced)
• Number of historical trends analyzed
• Median expected duration (most likely outcome)
• Average expected duration (mean of similar trends)
• Range (minimum to maximum from similar trends)
• Advanced multipliers breakdown (Advanced mode only)
• Backtest accuracy statistics (if available)
The box extends from the flip bar to the estimated endpoint based on historical data, giving you a visual target for trend duration. Box updates in real-time as trend progresses.
Backtest & Accuracy Tracking:
• System backtests its own duration estimates using historical data
• Shows accuracy metrics: how well duration estimates matched actual durations
• Tracks last 10 completed duration estimates separately
• Displays statistics in dashboard and duration analysis boxes
• Helps you understand statistical reliability on your specific symbol/timeframe
Anti-Repaint Guarantee:
• duration analysis boxes only appear AFTER bar close (barstate.isconfirmed)
• Historical duration estimates never disappear or change
• What you see in history is exactly what you would have seen real-time
• No future data leakage, no lookahead bias
2. INTELLIGENT PRESET CONFIGURATIONS - One-Click Optimization
Unlike indicators that require tedious parameter tweaking, this system includes professionally optimized presets for every trading style. Select your approach from the dropdown and ALL parameters auto-configure.
"AUTO (DETECT FROM TF)" - RECOMMENDED
The smartest option: automatically selects optimal settings based on your chart timeframe.
• 1m-5m charts → Scalping preset (ATR: 7, Mult: 2.0)
• 15m-1h charts → Day Trading preset (ATR: 10, Mult: 2.5)
• 2h-4h-D charts → Swing Trading preset (ATR: 14, Mult: 3.0)
• W-M charts → Position Trading preset (ATR: 21, Mult: 4.0)
Benefits:
• Zero configuration - works immediately
• Always matched to your timeframe
• Switch timeframe = automatic adjustment
• Perfect for traders who use multiple timeframes
"SCALPING (1-5M)" - Ultra-Fast Signals
Optimized for: 1-5 minute charts, high-frequency trading, quick profits
Target holding period: Minutes to 1-2 hours maximum
Best markets: High-volume stocks, major crypto pairs, active futures
Parameter Configuration:
• Supertrend: ATR 7, Multiplier 2.0 (very sensitive)
• Volume: MA 10, High 1.8x, Spike 3.0x (catches quick surges)
• Volume Momentum: AUTO-DISABLED (too restrictive for fast scalping)
• Quality minimum: 40 points (accepts more setups)
• Duration Analysis: Uses last 15 trends with heavy recent weighting
Trading Logic:
Speed over precision. Short ATR period and low multiplier create highly responsive SuperTrend. Volume momentum filter disabled to avoid missing fast moves. Quality threshold relaxed to catch more opportunities in rapid market conditions.
Signals per session: 5-15 typically
Hold time: Minutes to couple hours
Best for: Active traders with fast execution
"DAY TRADING (15M-1H)" - Balanced Approach
Optimized for: 15-minute to 1-hour charts, intraday moves, session-based trading
Target holding period: 30 minutes to 8 hours (within trading day)
Best markets: Large-cap stocks, major indices, established crypto
Parameter Configuration:
• Supertrend: ATR 10, Multiplier 2.5 (balanced)
• Volume: MA 20, High 1.5x, Spike 2.5x (standard detection)
• Volume Momentum: 5/20 periods (confirms intraday strength)
• Quality minimum: 50 points (good setups preferred)
• Duration Analysis: Balanced weighting of recent vs historical
Trading Logic:
The most balanced configuration. ATR 10 with multiplier 2.5 provides steady trend following that avoids noise while catching meaningful moves. Volume momentum confirms institutional participation without being overly restrictive.
Signals per session: 2-5 typically
Hold time: 30 minutes to full day
Best for: Part-time and full-time active traders
"SWING TRADING (4H-D)" - Trend Stability
Optimized for: 4-hour to Daily charts, multi-day holds, trend continuation
Target holding period: 2-15 days typically
Best markets: Growth stocks, sector ETFs, trending crypto, commodity futures
Parameter Configuration:
• Supertrend: ATR 14, Multiplier 3.0 (stable)
• Volume: MA 30, High 1.3x, Spike 2.2x (accumulation focus)
• Volume Momentum: 10/30 periods (trend stability)
• Quality minimum: 60 points (high-quality setups only)
• Duration Analysis: Favors consistent historical patterns
Trading Logic:
Designed for substantial trend moves while filtering short-term noise. Higher ATR period and multiplier create stable SuperTrend that won't flip on minor corrections. Stricter quality requirements ensure only strongest setups generate signals.
Signals per week: 2-5 typically
Hold time: Days to couple weeks
Best for: Part-time traders, swing style
"POSITION TRADING (D-W)" - Long-Term Trends
Optimized for: Daily to Weekly charts, major trend changes, portfolio allocation
Target holding period: Weeks to months
Best markets: Blue-chip stocks, major indices, established cryptocurrencies
Parameter Configuration:
• Supertrend: ATR 21, Multiplier 4.0 (very stable)
• Volume: MA 50, High 1.2x, Spike 2.0x (long-term accumulation)
• Volume Momentum: 20/50 periods (major trend confirmation)
• Quality minimum: 70 points (excellent setups only)
• Duration Analysis: Heavy emphasis on multi-year historical data
Trading Logic:
Conservative approach focusing on major trend changes. Extended ATR period and high multiplier create SuperTrend that only flips on significant reversals. Very strict quality filters ensure signals represent genuine long-term opportunities.
Signals per month: 1-2 typically
Hold time: Weeks to months
Best for: Long-term investors, set-and-forget approach
"CUSTOM" - Advanced Configuration
Purpose: Complete manual control for experienced traders
Use when: You understand the parameters and want specific optimization
Best for: Testing new approaches, unusual market conditions, specific instruments
Full control over:
• All SuperTrend parameters
• Volume thresholds and momentum periods
• Quality scoring weights
• analysis mode and multipliers
• Advanced features tuning
Preset Comparison Quick Reference:
Chart Timeframe: Scalping (1M-5M) | Day Trading (15M-1H) | Swing (4H-D) | Position (D-W)
Signals Frequency: Very High | High | Medium | Low
Hold Duration: Minutes | Hours | Days | Weeks-Months
Quality Threshold: 40 pts | 50 pts | 60 pts | 70 pts
ATR Sensitivity: Highest | Medium | Lower | Lowest
Time Investment: Highest | High | Medium | Lowest
Experience Level: Expert | Advanced | Intermediate | Beginner+
3. QUALITY SCORING SYSTEM (0-70 Points)
Every signal is rated in real-time across three dimensions:
Volume Confirmation (0-30 points):
• Volume Spike (2.5x+ average): 30 points
• High Volume (1.5x+ average): 20 points
• Above Average (1.0x+ average): 10 points
• Below Average: 0 points
Volatility Assessment (0-30 points):
• Expanding ATR (1.2x+ average): 30 points
• Rising ATR (1.0-1.2x average): 15 points
• Contracting/Stable ATR: 0 points
Volume Momentum (0-10 points):
• Strong Momentum (1.2x+ ratio): 10 points
• Rising Momentum (1.0-1.2x ratio): 5 points
• Weak/Neutral Momentum: 0 points
Score Interpretation:
60-70 points - EXCELLENT:
• All factors aligned
• High conviction setup
• Maximum position size (within risk limits)
• Primary trading opportunities
45-59 points - STRONG:
• Multiple confirmations present
• Above-average setup quality
• Standard position size
• Good trading opportunities
30-44 points - GOOD:
• Basic confirmations met
• Acceptable setup quality
• Reduced position size
• Wait for additional confirmation or trade smaller
Below 30 points - WEAK:
• Minimal confirmations
• Low probability setup
• Consider passing
• Only for aggressive traders in strong trends
Only signals meeting your minimum quality threshold (configurable per preset) generate alerts and labels.
4. MULTI-TIMEFRAME CONFLUENCE ANALYSIS
The system can simultaneously analyze trend alignment across 6 timeframes (optional feature):
Timeframes analyzed:
• 5-minute (scalping context)
• 15-minute (intraday momentum)
• 1-hour (day trading bias)
• 4-hour (swing context)
• Daily (primary trend)
• Weekly (macro trend)
Confluence Interpretation:
• 5-6/6 aligned - Very strong multi-timeframe agreement (highest confidence)
• 3-4/6 aligned - Moderate agreement (standard setup)
• 1-2/6 aligned - Weak agreement (caution advised)
Dashboard shows real-time alignment count with color-coding. Higher confluence typically correlates with longer, stronger trends.
5. VOLUME MOMENTUM FILTER - Institutional Money Flow
Unlike traditional volume indicators that just measure size, Volume Momentum tracks the RATE OF CHANGE in volume:
How it works:
• Compares short-term volume average (fast period) to long-term average (slow period)
• Ratio above 1.0 = Volume accelerating (money flowing IN)
• Ratio above 1.2 = Strong acceleration (institutional participation likely)
• Ratio below 0.8 = Volume decelerating (money flowing OUT)
Why it matters:
• Confirms trend with actual money flow, not just price
• Leading indicator (volume often leads price)
• Catches accumulation/distribution before breakouts
• More intuitive than complex mathematical filters
Integration with signals:
• Optional filter - can be enabled/disabled per preset
• When enabled: Only signals with rising volume momentum fire
• AUTO-DISABLED in Scalping mode (too restrictive for fast trading)
• Configurable fast/slow periods per trading style
6. ADAPTIVE SUPERTREND MULTIPLIER
Traditional SuperTrend uses fixed ATR multiplier. This system dynamically adjusts the multiplier (0.8x to 1.2x base) based on:
• Trend Strength: Price correlation over lookback period
• Volume Weight: Current volume relative to average
Benefits:
• Tighter bands in calm markets (less premature exits)
• Wider bands in volatile conditions (avoids whipsaws)
• Better adaptation to biotech, small-cap, and crypto volatility
• Optional - can be disabled for classic constant multiplier
7. VISUAL GRADIENT RIBBON
26-layer exponential gradient fill between price and SuperTrend line provides instant visual trend strength assessment:
Color System:
• Green shades - Bullish trend + volume confirmation (strongest)
• Blue shades - Bullish trend, normal volume
• Orange shades - Bearish trend + volume confirmation
• Red shades - Bearish trend (weakest)
Opacity varies based on:
• Distance from SuperTrend (farther = more opaque)
• Volume intensity (higher volume = stronger color)
The ribbon provides at-a-glance trend strength without cluttering your chart. Can be toggled on/off.
8. INTELLIGENT ALERT SYSTEM
Two-tier alert architecture for flexibility:
Automatic Alerts:
• Fire automatically on BUY and SELL signals
• Include full context: quality score, volume state, volume momentum
• One alert per bar close (alert.freq_once_per_bar_close)
• Message format: "BUY: Supertrend bullish + Quality: 65/70 | Volume: HIGH | Vol Momentum: STRONG (1.35x)"
Customizable Alert Conditions:
• Appear in TradingView's "Create Alert" dialog
• Three options: BUY Signal Only, SELL Signal Only, ANY Signal (BUY or SELL)
• Use TradingView placeholders: {{ticker}}, {{interval}}, {{close}}, {{time}}
• Fully customizable message templates
All alerts use barstate.isconfirmed - Zero repaint guarantee.
9. ANTI-REPAINT ARCHITECTURE
Every component guaranteed non-repainting:
• Entry signals: Only appear after bar close
• duration analysis boxes: Created only on confirmed SuperTrend flips
• Informative labels: Wait for bar confirmation
• Alerts: Fire once per closed bar
• Multi-timeframe data: Uses lookahead=barmerge.lookahead_off
What you see in history is exactly what you would have seen in real-time. No disappearing signals, no changed duration estimates.
HOW TO USE THE INDICATOR
QUICK START - 3 Steps to Trading:
Step 1: Select Your Trading Style
Open indicator settings → "Quick Setup" section → Trading Style Preset dropdown
Options:
• Auto (Detect from TF) - RECOMMENDED: Automatically configures based on your chart timeframe
• Scalping (1-5m) - For 1-5 minute charts, ultra-fast signals
• Day Trading (15m-1h) - For 15m-1h charts, balanced approach
• Swing Trading (4h-D) - For 4h-Daily charts, trend stability
• Position Trading (D-W) - For Daily-Weekly charts, long-term trends
• Custom - Manual configuration (advanced users only)
Choose "Auto" and you're done - all parameters optimize automatically.
Step 2: Understand the Signals
BUY Signal (Green Triangle Below Price):
• SuperTrend flipped bullish
• Quality score meets minimum threshold (varies by preset)
• Volume confirmation present (if filter enabled)
• Volume momentum rising (if filter enabled)
• duration analysis box shows expected trend duration
SELL Signal (Red Triangle Above Price):
• SuperTrend flipped bearish
• Quality score meets minimum threshold
• Volume confirmation present (if filter enabled)
• Volume momentum rising (if filter enabled)
• duration analysis box shows expected trend duration
Duration Analysis Box:
• Appears at SuperTrend flip (start of new trend)
• Shows median, average, and range duration estimates
• Extends to estimated endpoint based on historical data visually
• Updates mode-specific intelligence (Simple/Standard/Advanced)
Step 3: Use the Dashboard for Context
Dashboard (top-right corner) shows real-time metrics:
• Row 1 - Quality Score: Current setup rating (0-70)
• Row 2 - SuperTrend: Direction and current level
• Row 3 - Volume: Status (Spike/High/Normal/Low) with color
• Row 4 - Volatility: State (Expanding/Rising/Stable/Contracting)
• Row 5 - Volume Momentum: Ratio and trend
• Row 6 - Duration Statistics: Accuracy metrics and track record
Every cell has detailed tooltip - hover for full explanations.
SIGNAL INTERPRETATION BY QUALITY SCORE:
Excellent Setup (60-70 points):
• Quality Score: 60-70
• Volume: Spike or High
• Volatility: Expanding
• Volume Momentum: Strong (1.2x+)
• MTF Confluence (if enabled): 5-6/6
• Action: Primary trade - maximum position size (within risk limits)
• Statistical reliability: Highest - duration estimates most accurate
Strong Setup (45-59 points):
• Quality Score: 45-59
• Volume: High or Above Average
• Volatility: Rising
• Volume Momentum: Rising (1.0-1.2x)
• MTF Confluence (if enabled): 3-4/6
• Action: Standard trade - normal position size
• Statistical reliability: Good - duration estimates reliable
Good Setup (30-44 points):
• Quality Score: 30-44
• Volume: Above Average
• Volatility: Stable or Rising
• Volume Momentum: Neutral to Rising
• MTF Confluence (if enabled): 3-4/6
• Action: Cautious trade - reduced position size, wait for additional confirmation
• Statistical reliability: Moderate - duration estimates less certain
Weak Setup (Below 30 points):
• Quality Score: Below 30
• Volume: Low or Normal
• Volatility: Contracting or Stable
• Volume Momentum: Weak
• MTF Confluence (if enabled): 1-2/6
• Action: Pass or wait for improvement
• Statistical reliability: Low - duration estimates unreliable
USING duration analysis boxES FOR TRADE MANAGEMENT:
Entry Timing:
• Enter on SuperTrend flip (signal bar close)
• duration analysis box appears simultaneously
• Note the median duration - this is your expected hold time
Profit Targets:
• Conservative: Use MEDIAN duration as profit target (50% probability)
• Moderate: Use AVERAGE duration (mean of similar trends)
• Aggressive: Aim for MAX duration from range (best historical outcome)
Position Management:
• Scale out at median duration (take partial profits)
• Trail stop as trend extends beyond median
• Full exit at average duration or SuperTrend flip (whichever comes first)
• Re-evaluate if trend exceeds estimated range
analysis mode Selection:
• Simple: Clean trending markets, beginners, minimal complexity
• Standard: Most markets, most traders (recommended default)
• Advanced: Volatile markets, complex instruments, experienced traders seeking highest accuracy
Asset Type Configuration (Advanced Mode):
If using Advanced analysis mode, configure Asset Type for optimal accuracy:
• Small Cap: Stocks under $2B market cap, low liquidity
• Biotech / Speculative: Clinical-stage pharma, penny stocks, high-risk
• Blue Chip / Large Cap: S&P 500, mega-cap tech, stable large companies
• Tech Growth: High-growth tech (TSLA, NVDA, growth SaaS)
• Dividend / Value: Dividend aristocrats, value stocks, utilities
• Cyclical: Energy, materials, industrials (macro-driven)
• Crypto / High Volatility: Bitcoin, altcoins, highly volatile assets
Correct asset type selection improves Statistical accuracy by 15-20%.
RISK MANAGEMENT GUIDELINES:
1. Stop Loss Placement:
Long positions:
• Place stop below recent swing low OR
• Place stop below SuperTrend level (whichever is tighter)
• Use 1-2 ATR distance as guideline
• Recommended: SuperTrend level (built-in volatility adjustment)
Short positions:
• Place stop above recent swing high OR
• Place stop above SuperTrend level (whichever is tighter)
• Use 1-2 ATR distance as guideline
• Recommended: SuperTrend level
2. Position Sizing by Quality Score:
• Excellent (60-70): Maximum position size (2% risk per trade)
• Strong (45-59): Standard position size (1.5% risk per trade)
• Good (30-44): Reduced position size (1% risk per trade)
• Weak (Below 30): Pass or micro position (0.5% risk - learning trades only)
3. Exit Strategy Options:
Option A - Statistical Duration-Based Exit:
• Exit at median estimated duration (conservative)
• Exit at average estimated duration (moderate)
• Trail stop beyond average duration (aggressive)
Option B - Signal-Based Exit:
• Exit on opposite signal (SELL after BUY, or vice versa)
• Exit on SuperTrend flip (trend reversal)
• Exit if quality score drops below 30 mid-trend
Option C - Hybrid (Recommended):
• Take 50% profit at median estimated duration
• Trail stop on remaining 50% using SuperTrend as trailing level
• Full exit on SuperTrend flip or quality collapse
4. Trade Filtering:
For higher win-rate (fewer trades, better quality):
• Increase minimum quality score (try 60 for swing, 50 for day trading)
• Enable volume momentum filter (ensure institutional participation)
• Require higher MTF confluence (5-6/6 alignment)
• Use Advanced analysis mode with appropriate asset type
For more opportunities (more trades, lower quality threshold):
• Decrease minimum quality score (40 for day trading, 35 for scalping)
• Disable volume momentum filter
• Lower MTF confluence requirement
• Use Simple or Standard analysis mode
SETTINGS OVERVIEW
Quick Setup Section:
• Trading Style Preset: Auto / Scalping / Day Trading / Swing / Position / Custom
Dashboard & Display:
• Show Dashboard (ON/OFF)
• Dashboard Position (9 options: Top/Middle/Bottom + Left/Center/Right)
• Text Size (Auto/Tiny/Small/Normal/Large/Huge)
• Show Ribbon Fill (ON/OFF)
• Show SuperTrend Line (ON/OFF)
• Bullish Color (default: Green)
• Bearish Color (default: Red)
• Show Entry Labels - BUY/SELL signals (ON/OFF)
• Show Info Labels - Volume events (ON/OFF)
• Label Size (Auto/Tiny/Small/Normal/Large/Huge)
Supertrend Configuration:
• ATR Length (default varies by preset: 7-21)
• ATR Multiplier Base (default varies by preset: 2.0-4.0)
• Use Adaptive Multiplier (ON/OFF) - Dynamic 0.8x-1.2x adjustment
• Smoothing Factor (0.0-0.5) - EMA smoothing applied to bands
• Neutral Bars After Flip (0-10) - Hide ST immediately after flip
Volume Momentum:
• Enable Volume Momentum Filter (ON/OFF)
• Fast Period (default varies by preset: 3-20)
• Slow Period (default varies by preset: 10-50)
Volume Analysis:
• Volume MA Length (default varies by preset: 10-50)
• High Volume Threshold (default: 1.5x)
• Spike Threshold (default: 2.5x)
• Low Volume Threshold (default: 0.7x)
Quality Filters:
• Minimum Quality Score (0-70, varies by preset)
• Require Volume Confirmation (ON/OFF)
Trend Duration Analysis:
• Show Duration Analysis (ON/OFF) - Display duration analysis boxes
• analysis mode - Simple / Standard / Advanced
• Asset Type - 7 options (Small Cap, Biotech, Blue Chip, Tech Growth, Dividend, Cyclical, Crypto)
• Use Exponential Weighting (ON/OFF) - Recent trends weighted more
• Decay Factor (0.5-0.99) - How much more recent trends matter
• Structure Lookback (3-30) - Pivot detection period for support/resistance
• Proximity Threshold (xATR) - How close to level qualifies as "near"
• Enable Error Learning (ON/OFF) - System learns from estimation errors
• Memory Depth (3-20) - How many past errors to remember
Box Visual Settings:
• duration analysis box Border Color
• duration analysis box Background Color
• duration analysis box Text Color
• duration analysis box Border Width
• duration analysis box Transparency
Multi-Timeframe (Optional Feature):
• Enable MTF Confluence (ON/OFF)
• Minimum Alignment Required (0-6)
• Individual timeframe enable/disable toggles
• Custom timeframe selection options
All preset configurations override manual inputs except when "Custom" is selected.
ADVANCED FEATURES
1. Scalpel Mode (Optional)
Advanced pullback entry system that waits for healthy retracements within established trends before signaling entry:
• Monitors price distance from SuperTrend levels
• Requires pullback to configurable range (default: 30-50%)
• Ensures trend remains intact before entry signal
• Reduces whipsaw and false breakouts
• Inspired by Mark Minervini's VCP pullback entries
Best for: Swing traders and day traders seeking precision entries
Scalpers: Consider disabling for faster entries
2. Error Learning System (Advanced analysis mode Only)
The system learns from its own estimation errors:
• Tracks last 10-20 completed duration estimates (configurable memory depth)
• Calculates error ratio for each: estimated duration / Actual Duration
• If system consistently over-estimates: Applies negative correction (-15%)
• If system consistently under-estimates: Applies positive correction (+15%)
• Adapts to current market regime automatically
This self-correction mechanism improves accuracy over time as the system gathers more data on your specific symbol and timeframe.
3. Regime Detection (Advanced analysis mode Only)
Automatically detects whether market is in trending or choppy regime:
• Compares last 3 trends to historical average
• Recent trends 20%+ longer → Trending regime (+20% to estimates)
• Recent trends 20%+ shorter → Choppy regime (-20% to estimates)
• Applied separately to bullish and bearish trends
Helps duration estimates adapt to changing market conditions without manual intervention.
4. Exponential Weighting
Option to weight recent trends more heavily than distant history:
• Default decay factor: 0.9
• Recent trends get higher weight in statistical calculations
• Older trends gradually decay in importance
• Rationale: Recent market behavior more relevant than old data
• Can be disabled for equal weighting
5. Backtest Statistics
System backtests its own duration estimates using historical data:
• Walks through past trends chronologically
• Calculates what duration estimate WOULD have been at each flip
• Compares to actual duration that occurred
• Displays accuracy metrics in duration analysis boxes and dashboard
• Helps assess statistical reliability on your specific chart
Note: Backtest uses only data available AT THE TIME of each historical flip (no lookahead bias).
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
• Pine Script Version: v6
• Indicator Type: Overlay (draws on price chart)
• Max Boxes: 500 (for duration analysis box storage)
• Max Bars Back: 5000 (for comprehensive historical analysis)
• Security Calls: 1 (for MTF if enabled - optimized)
• Repainting: NO - All signals and duration estimates confirmed on bar close
• Lookahead Bias: NO - All HTF data properly offset, all duration estimates use only historical data
• Real-time Updates: YES - Dashboard and quality scores update live
• Alert Capable: YES - Both automatic alerts and customizable alert conditions
• Multi-Symbol: Works on stocks, crypto, forex, futures, indices
Performance Optimization:
• Conditional calculations (duration analysis can be disabled to reduce load)
• Efficient array management (circular buffers for trend storage)
• Streamlined gradient rendering (26 layers, can be toggled off)
• Smart label cooldown system (prevents label spam)
• Optimized similarity matching (analyzes only relevant trends)
Data Requirements:
• Minimum 50-100 bars for initial duration analysis (builds historical database)
• Optimal: 500+ bars for robust statistical analysis
• Longer history = more accurate duration estimates
• Works on any timeframe from 1 minute to monthly
KNOWN LIMITATIONS
• Trending Markets Only: Performs best in clear trends. May generate false signals in choppy/sideways markets (use quality score filtering and regime detection to mitigate)
• Lagging Nature: Like all trend-following systems, signals occur AFTER trend establishment, not at exact tops/bottoms. Use duration analysis boxes to set realistic profit targets.
• Initial Learning Period: Duration analysis system requires 10-15 completed trends to build reliable historical database. Early duration estimates less accurate (first few weeks on new symbol/timeframe).
• Visual Load: 26-layer gradient ribbon may slow performance on older devices. Disable ribbon if experiencing lag.
• Statistical accuracy Variables: Duration estimates are statistical estimates, not guarantees. Accuracy varies by:
- Market regime (trending vs choppy)
- Asset volatility characteristics
- Quality of historical pattern matches
- Timeframe traded (higher TF = more reliable)
• Not Best Suitable For:
- Ultra-short-term scalping (sub-1-minute charts)
- Mean-reversion strategies (designed for trend-following)
- Range-bound trading (requires trending conditions)
- News-driven spikes (estimates based on technical patterns, not fundamentals)
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Q: Does this indicator repaint?
A: Absolutely not. All signals, duration analysis boxes, labels, and alerts use barstate.isconfirmed checks. They only appear after the bar closes. What you see in history is exactly what you would have seen in real-time. Zero repaint guarantee.
Q: How accurate are the trend duration estimates?
A: Accuracy varies by mode, market conditions, and historical data quality:
• Simple mode: 60-70% accuracy (within ±20% of actual duration)
• Standard mode: 70-80% accuracy (within ±20% of actual duration)
• Advanced mode: 75-85% accuracy (within ±20% of actual duration)
Best accuracy achieved on:
• Higher timeframes (4H, Daily, Weekly)
• Trending markets (not choppy/sideways)
• Assets with consistent behavior (Blue Chip, Large Cap)
• After 20+ historical trends analyzed (builds robust database)
Remember: All duration estimates are statistical calculations based on historical patterns, not guarantees.
Q: Which analysis mode should I use?
A:
• Simple: Beginners, clean trending markets, want minimal complexity
• Standard: Most traders, general market conditions (RECOMMENDED DEFAULT)
• Advanced: Experienced traders, volatile/complex markets (biotech, small-cap, crypto), seeking maximum accuracy
Advanced mode requires correct Asset Type configuration for optimal results.
Q: What's the difference between the trading style presets?
A: Each preset optimizes ALL parameters for a specific trading approach:
• Scalping: Ultra-sensitive (ATR 7, Mult 2.0), more signals, shorter holds
• Day Trading: Balanced (ATR 10, Mult 2.5), moderate signals, intraday holds
• Swing Trading: Stable (ATR 14, Mult 3.0), fewer signals, multi-day holds
• Position Trading: Very stable (ATR 21, Mult 4.0), rare signals, week/month holds
Auto mode automatically selects based on your chart timeframe.
Q: Should I use Auto mode or manually select a preset?
A: Auto mode is recommended for most traders. It automatically matches settings to your timeframe and re-optimizes if you switch charts. Only use manual preset selection if:
• You want scalping settings on a 15m chart (overriding auto-detection)
• You want swing settings on a 1h chart (more conservative than auto would give)
• You're testing different approaches on same timeframe
Q: Can I use this for scalping and day trading?
A: Absolutely! The preset system is specifically designed for all trading styles:
• Select "Scalping (1-5m)" for 1-5 minute charts
• Select "Day Trading (15m-1h)" for 15m-1h charts
• Or use "Auto" mode and it configures automatically
Volume momentum filter is auto-disabled in Scalping mode for faster signals.
Q: What is Volume Momentum and why does it matter?
A: Volume Momentum compares short-term volume (fast MA) to long-term volume (slow MA). It answers: "Is money flowing into this asset faster now than historically?"
Why it matters:
• Volume often leads price (early warning system)
• Confirms institutional participation (smart money)
• No lag like price-based indicators
• More intuitive than complex mathematical filters
When the ratio is above 1.2, you have strong evidence that institutions are accumulating (bullish) or distributing (bearish).
Q: How do I set up alerts?
A: Two options:
Option 1 - Automatic Alerts:
1. Right-click on chart → Add Alert
2. Condition: Select this indicator
3. Choose "Any alert() function call"
4. Configure notification method (app, email, webhook)
5. You'll receive detailed alerts on every BUY and SELL signal
Option 2 - Customizable Alert Conditions:
1. Right-click on chart → Add Alert
2. Condition: Select this indicator
3. You'll see three options in dropdown:
- "BUY Signal" (long signals only)
- "SELL Signal" (short signals only)
- "ANY Signal" (both BUY and SELL)
4. Choose desired option and customize message template
5. Uses TradingView placeholders: {{ticker}}, {{close}}, {{time}}, etc.
All alerts fire only on confirmed bar close (no repaint).
Q: What is Scalpel Mode and should I use it?
A: Scalpel Mode waits for healthy pullbacks within established trends before signaling entry. It reduces whipsaws and improves entry timing.
Recommended ON for:
• Swing traders (want precision entries on pullbacks)
• Day traders (willing to wait for better prices)
• Risk-averse traders (prefer fewer but higher-quality entries)
Recommended OFF for:
• Scalpers (need immediate entries, can't wait for pullbacks)
• Momentum traders (want to enter on breakout, not pullback)
• Aggressive traders (prefer more opportunities over precision)
Q: Why do some duration estimates show wider ranges than others?
A: Range width reflects historical trend variability:
• Narrow range: Similar historical trends had consistent durations (high confidence)
• Wide range: Similar historical trends had varying durations (lower confidence)
Wide ranges often occur:
• Early in analysis (fewer historical trends to learn from)
• In volatile/choppy markets (inconsistent trend behavior)
• On lower timeframes (more noise, less consistency)
The median and average still provide useful targets even when range is wide.
Q: Can I customize the dashboard position and appearance?
A: Yes! Dashboard settings include:
• Position: 9 options (Top/Middle/Bottom + Left/Center/Right)
• Text Size: Auto, Tiny, Small, Normal, Large, Huge
• Show/Hide: Toggle entire dashboard on/off
Choose position that doesn't overlap important price action on your specific chart.
Q: Which timeframe should I trade on?
A: Depends on your trading style and time availability:
• 1-5 minute: Active scalping, requires constant monitoring
• 15m-1h: Day trading, check few times per session
• 4h-Daily: Swing trading, check once or twice daily
• Daily-Weekly: Position trading, check weekly
General principle: Higher timeframes produce:
• Fewer signals (less frequent)
• Higher quality setups (stronger confirmations)
• More reliable duration estimates (better statistical data)
• Less noise (clearer trends)
Start with Daily chart if new to trading. Move to lower timeframes as you gain experience.
Q: Does this work on all markets (stocks, crypto, forex)?
A: Yes, it works on all markets with trending characteristics:
Excellent for:
• Stocks (especially growth and momentum names)
• Crypto (BTC, ETH, major altcoins)
• Futures (indices, commodities)
• Forex majors (EUR/USD, GBP/USD, etc.)
Best results on:
• Trending markets (not range-bound)
• Liquid instruments (tight spreads, good fills)
• Volatile assets (clear trend development)
Less effective on:
• Range-bound/sideways markets
• Ultra-low volatility instruments
• Illiquid small-caps (use caution)
Configure Asset Type (in Advanced analysis mode) to match your instrument for best accuracy.
Q: How many signals should I expect per day/week?
A: Highly variable based on:
By Timeframe:
• 1-5 minute: 5-15 signals per session
• 15m-1h: 2-5 signals per day
• 4h-Daily: 2-5 signals per week
• Daily-Weekly: 1-2 signals per month
By Market Volatility:
• High volatility = more SuperTrend flips = more signals
• Low volatility = fewer flips = fewer signals
By Quality Filter:
• Higher threshold (60-70) = fewer but better signals
• Lower threshold (30-40) = more signals, lower quality
By Volume Momentum Filter:
• Enabled = Fewer signals (only volume-confirmed)
• Disabled = More signals (all SuperTrend flips)
Adjust quality threshold and filters to match your desired signal frequency.
Q: What's the difference between entry labels and info labels?
A:
Entry Labels (BUY/SELL):
• Your primary trading signals
• Based on SuperTrend flip + all confirmations (quality, volume, momentum)
• Include quality score and confirmation icons
• These are actionable entry points
Info Labels (Volume Spike):
• Additional market context
• Show volume events that may support or contradict trend
• 8-bar cooldown to prevent spam
• NOT necessarily entry points - contextual information only
Control separately: Can show entry labels without info labels (recommended for clean charts).
Q: Can I combine this with other indicators?
A: Absolutely! This works well with:
• RSI: For divergences and overbought/oversold conditions
• Support/Resistance: Confluence with key levels
• Fibonacci Retracements: Pullback targets in Scalpel Mode
• Price Action Patterns: Flags, pennants, cup-and-handle
• MACD: Additional momentum confirmation
• Bollinger Bands: Volatility context
This indicator provides trend direction and duration estimates - complement with other tools for entry refinement and additional confluence.
Q: Why did I get a low-quality signal? Can I filter them out?
A: Yes! Increase the Minimum Quality Score in settings.
If you're seeing signals with quality below your preference:
• Day Trading: Set minimum to 50
• Swing Trading: Set minimum to 60
• Position Trading: Set minimum to 70
Only signals meeting the threshold will appear. This reduces frequency but improves win-rate.
Q: How do I interpret the MTF Confluence count?
A: Shows how many of 6 timeframes agree with current trend:
• 6/6 aligned: Perfect agreement (extremely rare, highest confidence)
• 5/6 aligned: Very strong alignment (high confidence)
• 4/6 aligned: Good alignment (standard quality setup)
• 3/6 aligned: Moderate alignment (acceptable)
• 2/6 aligned: Weak alignment (caution)
• 1/6 aligned: Very weak (likely counter-trend)
Higher confluence typically correlates with longer, stronger trends. However, MTF analysis is optional - you can disable it and rely solely on quality scoring.
Q: Is this suitable for beginners?
A: Yes, but requires foundational knowledge:
You should understand:
• Basic trend-following concepts (higher highs, higher lows)
• Risk management principles (position sizing, stop losses)
• How to read candlestick charts
• What volume and volatility mean
Beginner-friendly features:
• Auto preset mode (zero configuration)
• Quality scoring (tells you signal strength)
• Dashboard tooltips (hover for explanations)
• duration analysis boxes (visual profit targets)
Recommended for beginners:
1. Start with "Auto" or "Swing Trading" preset on Daily chart
2. Use Standard Analysis Mode (not Advanced)
3. Set minimum quality to 60 (fewer but better signals)
4. Paper trade first for 2-4 weeks
5. Study methodology references (Minervini, O'Neil, Zanger)
Q: What is the Asset Type setting and why does it matter?
A: Asset Type (in Advanced analysis mode) adjusts duration estimates based on volatility characteristics:
• Small Cap: Explosive moves, extended trends (+30-40%)
• Biotech / Speculative: Parabolic potential, news-driven (+40%)
• Blue Chip / Large Cap: Baseline, steady trends (0% adjustment)
• Tech Growth: Momentum-driven, longer trends (+20%)
• Dividend / Value: Slower, grinding trends (-20%)
• Cyclical: Macro-driven, variable (±10%)
• Crypto / High Volatility: Parabolic potential (+30%)
Correct configuration improves Statistical accuracy by 15-20%. Using Blue Chip settings on a biotech stock may underestimate trend length (you'll exit too early).
Q: Can I backtest this indicator?
A: Yes! TradingView's Strategy Tester works with this indicator's signals.
To backtest:
1. Note the entry conditions (SuperTrend flip + quality threshold + filters)
2. Create a strategy script using same logic
3. Run Strategy Tester on historical data
Additionally, the indicator includes BUILT-IN duration estimate validation:
• System backtests its own duration estimates
• Shows accuracy metrics in dashboard and duration analysis boxes
• Helps assess reliability on your specific symbol/timeframe
Q: Why does Volume Momentum auto-disable in Scalping mode?
A: Scalping requires ultra-fast entries to catch quick moves. Volume Momentum filter adds friction by requiring volume confirmation before signaling, which can cause missed opportunities in rapid scalping.
Scalping preset is optimized for speed and frequency - the filter is counterproductive for that style. It remains enabled for Day Trading, Swing Trading, and Position Trading presets where patience improves results.
You can manually enable it in Custom mode if desired.
Q: How much historical data do I need for accurate duration estimates?
A:
Minimum: 50-100 bars (indicator will function but duration estimates less reliable)
Recommended: 500+ bars (robust statistical database)
Optimal: 1000+ bars (maximum Statistical accuracy)
More history = more completed trends = better pattern matching = more accurate duration estimates.
New symbols or newly-switched timeframes will have lower Statistical accuracy initially. Allow 2-4 weeks for the system to build historical database.
IMPORTANT DISCLAIMERS
No Guarantee of Profit:
This indicator is an educational tool and does not guarantee any specific trading results. All trading involves substantial risk of loss. Duration estimates are statistical calculations based on historical patterns and are not guarantees of future performance.
Past Performance:
Historical backtest results and Statistical accuracy statistics do not guarantee future performance. Market conditions change constantly. What worked historically may not work in current or future markets.
Not Financial Advice:
This indicator provides technical analysis signals and statistical duration estimates only. It is not financial, investment, or trading advice. Always consult with a qualified financial advisor before making investment decisions.
Risk Warning:
Trading stocks, options, futures, forex, and cryptocurrencies involves significant risk. You can lose all of your invested capital. Never trade with money you cannot afford to lose. Only risk capital you can lose without affecting your lifestyle.
Testing Required:
Always test this indicator on a demo account or with paper trading before risking real capital. Understand how it works in different market conditions. Verify Statistical accuracy on your specific instruments and timeframes before trusting it with real money.
User Responsibility:
You are solely responsible for your trading decisions. The developer assumes no liability for trading losses, incorrect duration estimates, software errors, or any other damages incurred while using this indicator.
Statistical Estimation Limitations:
Trend Duration estimates are statistical estimates based on historical pattern matching. They are NOT guarantees. Actual trend durations may differ significantly from duration estimates due to unforeseen news events, market regime changes, or lack of historical precedent for current conditions.
CREDITS & ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Methodology Inspiration:
• Mark Minervini - Volatility Contraction Pattern (VCP) concepts and pullback entry techniques
• William O'Neil - Volume analysis principles and CANSLIM institutional buying patterns
• Dan Zanger - Momentum breakout strategies and volatility expansion entries
Technical Components:
• SuperTrend calculation - Classic ATR-based trend indicator (public domain)
• Statistical analysis - Standard median, average, range calculations
• k-Nearest Neighbors - Classic machine learning similarity matching concept
• Multi-timeframe analysis - Standard request.security implementation in Pine Script
For questions, feedback, or support, please comment below or send a private message.
Happy Trading!
Manipulation Model [FB]GENERAL OVERVIEW:
The Manipulation Model indicator is a complete rule-based system that identifies and confirms setups from the Funded Brothers Manipulation Model. It detects large impulsive candles, called Manipulation Candles and Almost Manipulation Candles, that form around key market levels such as session highs/lows, daily, weekly, and monthly levels, or higher timeframe Fair Value Gaps (FVGs). Using this structure, the indicator automatically marks long, short, bulltrap, and beartrap setups with predefined entry, stop loss, and take profit areas.
This indicator was developed by Flux Charts in collaboration with the Funded Brothers.
ATTRIBUTION NOTICE:
This indicator incorporates concepts and source code from the indicator “MCs with Alerts” authored by @hamza_xau on TradingView. We have received full written permission from the original author to use and commercialize this code within this invite-only script.
Original script: MCs with Alerts:
What is the purpose of the indicator?:
The indicator automates detection of the Manipulation Model trading strategy setups by combining candle structure, key levels, session timing, and higher timeframe Fair Value Gaps. It removes discretion by enforcing fixed conditions for valid signals and automatically managing entry, stop-loss, and take-profit logic.
What is the theory behind the indicator?:
The indicator is built on how price interacts with major reference points such as session highs and lows, or daily and weekly levels. These levels are commonly referenced in technical analysis as areas where price previously reversed or consolidated. Manipulation Candles identify moments when price breaks past these reference points on both sides of the prior candle before closing firmly in one direction. When these candles form near higher timeframe Fair Value Gaps, it reflects price reacting inside an area that previously showed directional imbalance. The higher timeframe EMA filter aligns all detected setups with the broader market trend, allowing only signals that match the dominant direction.
MANIPULATION MODEL FEATURES:
Manipulation Candlesticks
Almost Manipulation Candlesticks
Higher Timeframe Fair Value Gaps
Sessions
Key Levels
Signals
Dashboard
Alerts
MANIPULATION CANDLESTICKS:
Manipulation Candlesticks (MCs) are candles that sweep both sides of the previous candle’s range and close outside of it. In the Manipulation Model indicator, these candles form the foundation for the long/short setups. Once one forms, the indicator checks its position relative to sessions, key levels, and higher timeframe Fair Value Gaps to determine if a valid setup exists.
🔹What is a Manipulation Candlestick?
A Manipulation Candlestick (MC) is defined by structure rather than size. It forms when price takes out both the high and low of the previous candle, then closes outside that range.
A bullish Manipulation Candle occurs when price sweeps below the previous candle’s low and then closes above the previous candle’s high.
A bearish Manipulation Candle occurs when price sweeps above the previous candle’s high and then closes below the previous candle’s low.
🔹How to interpret and use Manipulation Candlesticks:
Manipulation Candlesticks show where price made a strong one-sided move after taking both sides of the previous candle’s range. When one forms, it marks an area where buyers or sellers were likely trapped as price moved aggressively in one direction.
A bullish MC shows strong buying after a false move lower. Price sweeps below the prior low, takes out the prior high, and closes above the previous range, confirming buyers are in control.
A bearish MC shows strong selling after a false move higher than the previous candle’s high. Price sweeps above the prior high, drops below the prior low, and closes beneath the previous range, confirming sellers are dominant.
🔹How Manipulation Candlesticks are identified:
The indicator confirms Manipulation Candles using three filters once a candle closes:
Sweep Condition:
Price must take both sides of the previous candle’s range, moving above its high and below its low, before closing outside that range.
Directional Close:
A bullish MC must close above the previous high, and a bearish MC must close below the previous low.
Wick Confirmation:
A bullish MC must have a smaller upper wick (high - close) than lower wick (open - low), and a bearish MC must have a smaller lower wick (close - low) than upper wick (high - open).
Once these conditions are met at candle close, it is confirmed as a bullish or bearish Manipulation Candle.
🔹Bullish Manipulation Candle
A bullish Manipulation Candle forms when price sweeps below the previous candle’s low, then breaks above its high, and closes above it. The lower wick must be larger than the upper wick, showing little pullback as price pushed upward and confirming strong buying pressure.
🔹Bearish Manipulation Candle
A bearish Manipulation Candle forms when price sweeps above the previous candle’s high, then drops below its low, and closes beneath it. The upper wick must be larger than the lower wick, showing little pullback as price moved downward and confirming strong selling pressure.
🔹Manipulation Candle Visuals
When the indicator detects a Manipulation Candle, it automatically changes the candle’s color on the chart. Both bullish and bearish Manipulation Candles use the same color. Users can change this color in the settings by adjusting the “Manipulation Candlestick” option found under the “Style Customization” section.
The candle coloring feature can also be turned off entirely, which only removes the visual highlight from the chart and does not affect the signals or any of the indicator’s underlying logic that uses Manipulation Candlesticks.
ALMOST MANIPULATION CANDLESTICKS:
Almost Manipulation Candlesticks (AMCs) are similar to Manipulation Candles, except they close inside the previous candle’s range instead of outside it. In the Manipulation Model indicator, these candles help identify when price is showing the same sweeping behavior but hasn’t yet confirmed full displacement. They act as early warnings that a manipulation event may be developing. Just like Manipulation Candles, the indicator checks an AMC’s position relative to sessions, key levels, and higher timeframe Fair Value Gaps to determine if a valid setup exists.
🔹What is an Almost Manipulation Candlestick?
An Almost Manipulation Candlestick (AMC) forms when price sweeps both the high and low of the previous candle and closes inside that candle’s range.
A bullish AMC occurs when price sweeps below the previous low, moves above the previous high, and closes within the previous candle’s body instead of above it.
A bearish AMC occurs when price sweeps above the previous high, drops below the previous low, and closes within the previous candle’s body instead of beneath it.
🔹How to Interpret and Use Almost Manipulation Candlesticks:
Almost Manipulation Candles highlight hesitation or early signs of manipulation.
A bullish AMC indicates buyers pushed price up after sweeping lower, but price did not close decisively above the prior high.
A bearish AMC indicates sellers pushed price down after sweeping higher, but price did not close decisively below the prior low.
🔹How Almost Manipulation Candlesticks are identified:
The indicator confirms Almost Manipulation Candles using the same sweep and wick logic as Manipulation Candles, except the candle’s close must remain inside the previous candle’s range:
Sweep Condition:
Price must take both sides of the previous candle’s range, moving above its high and below its low.
Candle Close Location:
The candle’s close must stay within the prior candle’s range.
Wick Confirmation:
For a bullish AMC, the lower wick must be larger than the upper wick. For a bearish AMC, the upper wick must be larger than the lower wick.
Once these conditions are met at candle close, it is confirmed as a bullish or bearish Almost Manipulation Candle.
🔹Bullish Almost Manipulation Candle
A bullish AMC forms when price sweeps below the previous candle’s low, moves above the prior candle’s high, and closes back inside the previous candle’s range. The lower wick must be larger than the upper wick, showing that buyers defended lower prices but the move did not close decisively upward.
🔹Bearish Almost Manipulation Candle
A bearish AMC forms when price sweeps above the previous candle’s high, drops below the previous candle’s low, and closes back inside the previous candle’s range. The upper wick must be larger than the lower wick, showing that sellers rejected higher prices but the candle did not close decisively lower.
🔹Almost Manipulation Candle Visuals
When the indicator detects an Almost Manipulation Candle, it automatically changes the candle’s color on the chart. Both bullish and bearish Almost Manipulation Candles use the same color. Users can change this color in the settings by adjusting the “Almost Manipulation Candlestick” option found under the “Style Customization” section.
The candle coloring feature can also be turned off entirely, which only removes the visual highlight from the chart and does not affect the signals or any of the indicator’s underlying logic that uses Almost Manipulation Candlesticks.
HIGHER TIMEFRAME FAIR VALUE GAPS:
The Manipulation Model indicator automatically plots Fair Value Gaps from two user-selected higher timeframes.
🔹What is a Fair Value Gap?:
A Fair Value Gap (FVG) is an area where the market’s perception of fair value suddenly changes. On your chart, it appears as a three-candle pattern: a large candle in the middle, with smaller candles on each side that don’t fully overlap it. A bullish FVG forms when a bullish candle is between two smaller bullish/bearish candles, where the first and third candles’ wicks don’t overlap each other at all. A bearish FVG forms when a bearish candle is between two smaller bullish/bearish candles, where the first and third candles’ wicks don’t overlap each other at all.
Bullish & Bearish FVGs:
🔹Why are Fair Value Gaps important?:
Fair Value Gaps (FVGs) show where price moved so quickly that one side of the market never got a chance to trade. They represent sudden shifts in what traders believe something is worth, where “fair value” changed. When a large candle drives straight through an area without overlap from the candles before and after it, it means buyers or sellers were so aggressive that the market skipped that price zone entirely.
These gaps matter because they mark the moment when confidence in price changes. If price rallies and never pulls back, it signals that traders accept the new higher prices as fair and are willing to keep buying there. The same logic applies in reverse for bearish gaps. They tell you where the market re-priced aggressively and where value was last accepted.
🔹How are Fair Value Gaps used?:
Higher Timeframe FVGs are used as a confluence for all setups within the Manipulation Model indicator. The indicator automatically detects and plots these imbalances from the chosen higher timeframe onto the current chart. When a Manipulation or Almost Manipulation Candle forms near or inside a higher timeframe Fair Value Gap, it adds context to the setup. They are not trade signals by themselves but act as a supporting element that contextualizes setups.
🔹When are Higher Timeframe Fair Value Gaps mitigated?
A Higher Timeframe Fair Value Gap is considered mitigated when the selected higher timeframe closes above the gap for a bearish FVG or below the gap for a bullish FVG.
🔹Higher Timeframe FVG Settings:
Timeframe 1 / Timeframe 2:
Select up to two higher timeframes to use for Fair Value Gaps. Disabling either one removes it visually from the chart but does not affect signal generation. However, the timeframes you select will be used for signal generation logic.
For example, if you select the 1-hour and 4-hour timeframes, then the 1-hour and 4-hour FVGs will be used for signal generation logic, which is explained in the signals section below.
Combine Zones:
When enabled, overlapping FVGs on the same higher timeframe are merged into a single zone. This keeps the chart clean and prevents duplicate zones from displaying.
Midline:
Adds a center line through each higher timeframe FVG.
Labels:
Displays a “ FVG” label beside each zone. This helps users see which timeframe the FVG is detected from.
Color Customization:
Each timeframe has separate color settings for bullish and bearish FVGs. Users can adjust these colors independently for both timeframes to fit their chart layout.
FVG Display Limit:
Controls how many higher timeframe FVGs are shown at once. Only the nearest X active gaps to current price will appear, helping maintain a clear view of relevant imbalances.
SESSIONS:
The Manipulation Model indicator includes six customizable trading sessions: Asia, London, NY AM, NYSE, London Close, and NY PM. All session times and visuals are fully user-configurable. Each session has adjustable start and end times that can be set to match your preferred schedule. Users can also customize visuals for each session, including the color, opacity, and visibility of session zones.
Session highs and lows are automatically tracked and used within the indicator’s signal logic. When a Manipulation or Almost Manipulation Candle forms near a session high or low, it is recognized within the indicator’s signal detection.
Default times used for each session (in EST):
Asia: 20:00 - 00:00
London: 02:00 - 05:00
NY AM: 08:00 - 09:30
NYSE: 09:30 - 10:00
London Close: 10:00 - 11:00
NY PM: 11:00 - 14:00
🔹Session Settings:
Session Boxes:
Each session has a box that outlines its active time window. These boxes can be toggled on or off independently. When active, they visually separate each part of the trading day. Users can adjust the color and opacity of each session box.
Session Highs/Lows:
Every session can display its own high and low as horizontal lines. Users can customize the line style for session highs/lows, choosing between solid, dashed, or dotted. The color of the lines will match the same color used for the session box.
Labels and Price Display:
Labels can be toggled on for all session highs and lows. Users can adjust label color, text size, and choose whether to show the price next to the label. Users can adjust the text size, choosing between tiny, small, normal, large, and huge.
Extend Levels:
When enabled, each session’s high and low levels can be extended forward by a set number of bars.
Session Titles:
Titles for each enabled session (e.g., “Asia,” “London,” “NY AM”) can be displayed directly on the chart.
Show Last:
The “Show Last” setting allows you to choose how many recent sessions of each type appear on the chart. For example, if you only have the Asia session enabled and have this setting set to 2, the recent two Asia sessions will be displayed.
🔹Sessions Used
Under the “Sessions Used” section in the settings, users can choose which sessions are active for signal generation. Only sessions enabled here will produce signals. For example, if you want setups to form only during the London session, turn off all other sessions in this section.
Disabling a session under the main Sessions section only hides its visuals (boxes, lines, or labels). It does not impact signal detection or logic. However, changing a session’s start and end time in either section will affect signals, since signals are tied to the exact session windows defined by the user. This distinction ensures you have full control over what’s displayed visually versus what contributes to active trade signal logic.
Please Note: Signals are only detected and plotted on your chart during sessions. Signals can not be detected outside of session time windows.
KEY LEVELS:
The Manipulation Model indicator includes 10 key market levels that outline important structural price areas across daily, weekly, and monthly timeframes. These levels include the Daily Open, Previous Day High/Low, Weekly Open, Previous Week High/Low, Monthly Open, Previous Month High/Low, and Midnight Open. The levels can be enabled or disabled and customized in color and line style. These levels are used for the indicator’s signal logic.
🔹Daily Open
The Daily Open marks where the current trading day began.
🔹Previous Day High/Low
The Previous Day High (PDH) marks the highest price reached during the previous regular trading session. It shows where buyers pushed price to its highest point before the market closed. This value is automatically pulled from the daily chart and projected forward onto intraday timeframes.
The Previous Day Low (PDL) marks the lowest price reached during the previous regular trading session. It shows where selling pressure reached its lowest point before buyers stepped in. Like the PDH, this level is retrieved from the prior day’s data and extended into the current session.
🔹Weekly Open
The Weekly Open marks the first price of the current trading week.
🔹Previous Week High/Low
The Previous Week High (PWH) marks the highest price reached during the previous trading week. It shows where buying pressure reached its peak before the weekly close. This value is automatically pulled from the weekly chart and extended forward into the current week for easy reference on intraday timeframes.
The Previous Week Low (PWL) marks the lowest price reached during the previous trading week. It shows where sellers pushed price to its lowest point before buyers regained control. Like the PWH, this level is sourced from the prior week’s data and projected onto the current week’s chart.
🔹Monthly Open
The Monthly Open marks the opening price of the current month.
🔹Previous Month High/Low
The Previous Month High (PMH) marks the highest price reached during the previous calendar month. It represents the point at which buyers achieved the strongest push before the monthly close. This level is automatically retrieved from the monthly chart and extended into the new month on all lower timeframes.
The Previous Month Low (PML) marks the lowest price reached during the previous calendar month. It shows where selling pressure was strongest before buyers stepped back in. Like the PMH, this value is pulled from the prior month’s data and extended into the new month on all lower timeframes.
🔹Midnight Open
The Midnight Open marks the first price of the trading day at 00:00 EST.
🔹Customization Options:
Users can fully customize the appearance of all key levels, including the following:
Daily Levels: Daily Open, PDH, and PDL
Weekly Levels: Weekly Open, PWH, and PWL
Monthly Levels: Monthly Open, PMH, and PML
Midnight Open
Color Settings:
Each group of levels (Daily, Weekly, Monthly) shares a single color for the Open, High, and Low lines. For example, the Daily Open, PDH, and PDL all use the same color. Colors can be changed for each group, but not for individual levels within the same group.
Line Style:
Users can select a global line style, choosing between solid, dashed, or dotted, for all Daily, Weekly, and Monthly levels. This style applies to all levels within those groups. For example, the Weekly Open, PWH, and PWL must all share the same line style.
The Midnight Open has its own independent line style setting and can use a different style from the other key levels.
Show Labels:
When enabled, text labels appear to the right of each key level. Users can adjust label color, but only one label color is applied to all levels for consistency.
🔹Key Levels Used:
Under the “Key Levels Used” section, users can choose which Key Levels and Session Levels (Session Highs/Lows) are factored into signal generation. Only levels enabled here are considered within the logic that confirms setups.
Users can choose between the following levels:
Daily Open
Previous Day High/Low
Weekly Open
Previous Week High/Low
Monthly Open
Previous Month High/Low
Asia Session High/Low
London Session High/Low
NY AM Session High/Low
NY Lunch Session High/Low
NY PM Session High/Low
London Close Session High/Low
Midnight Open
For example, if you only want to see setups that form using the Daily and Weekly levels, you should only enable the Daily Open, Previous Day High/Low, Weekly Open, and Previous Week High/Low.
Disabling a level in the main “Key Levels” section only hides its visuals, while disabling it in “Key Levels Used” removes it entirely from the signal logic. Adjusting or removing any level in this section directly affects how setups are detected since the indicator references these levels when confirming Long, Short, Bulltrap, and Beartrap setups.
SIGNALS:
The Manipulation Model indicator automatically identifies Long, Short, Bulltrap, and Beartrap setups based on the interaction between Manipulation Candles (MCs), Almost Manipulation Candles (AMCs), and two main entry conditions: Key Levels and Fair Value Gaps (FVGs).
Each signal type uses the structure of a Manipulation or Almost Manipulation Candle as its foundation. When one of these candles forms and aligns with the entry conditions, the indicator automatically plots labels for an entry, stop loss (SL), and take profit (TP). Every signal follows a mechanical set of rules and is marked in real time. Once confirmed on a candle close, the signal remains fixed on the chart and does not repaint.
🔹Higher Timeframe Bias Filter
Before a signal is generated, the indicator automatically determines directional bias using the 50-period Exponential Moving Average (EMA) on the 1-hour timeframe.
If price is above the 50 EMA, only bullish setups are allowed.
If price is below the 50 EMA, only bearish setups are allowed.
🔹Stop Loss and Take Profit Logic:
For every setup, the stop loss is placed at the low of the Manipulation or Almost Manipulation Candle for bullish setups, and at the high for bearish setups. The take profit is automatically calculated at a 1:1 risk-to-reward ratio relative to that distance.
Users can adjust both the SL Multiplier and TP Multiplier in the settings, under the “General Configuration” section, to extend or contract these levels. For example, increasing the TP Multiplier to 1.5 sets the take profit at 1.5x the distance between the entry and stop loss.
🔹Signal Input Settings:
Candle Type:
Choose which candle type is used to generate signals. Options include:
Manipulation Candle (MC) only
Almost Manipulation Candle (AMC) only
Both (signals are generated from either candle type)
Entry Method:
Determines whether signals are generated based on:
Key Levels only
Fair Value Gaps only
Both (signals are generated from Key Levels AND Fair Value Gaps)
Setup Types:
You can enable or disable specific setup types. Only the selected setup types will appear on your chart:
Long Setups
Short Setups
Bulltrap Setups
Beartrap Setups
🔹Long Setup – Manipulation Candle + Key Level:
A long setup forms when a bullish Manipulation Candle touches a toggled-on key level under the “Key Levels Used” section and closes above it during a toggled-on session from the “Sessions Used” section. After the candle closes and price is above the 1-hour 50 EMA, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the close of the bullish Manipulation Candle
Stop Loss: At the low of the same candle
Take Profit: Equal distance above the entry, based on TP multiplier
In this example, a bullish MC touches the PDH during the London Session and closes above the level:
🔹Short Setup – Manipulation Candle + Key Level
A short setup forms when a bearish Manipulation Candle touches a toggled-on key level under the “Key Levels Used” section and closes below it during a toggled-on session from the “Sessions Used” section. After the candle closes and price is below the 1-hour 50 EMA, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the close of the bearish Manipulation Candle
Stop Loss: At the high of the same candle
Take Profit: Equal distance below the entry, based on the TP Multiplier
In this example, a bearish MC touches the Daily Open during the NY AM Session and closes below the level:
🔹Trap Confirmation Settings
Two settings control how bulltrap and beartrap setups are confirmed once a Manipulation or Almost Manipulation Candle forms.
Candles Between Confirmation:
This setting defines the maximum number of candles allowed between the initial Manipulation Candle and the confirmation candle that closes back in the opposite direction.
For example, if this value is set to 2, the confirmation candle must appear within two bars of the Manipulation Candle for the setup to remain valid. If too many candles form in between, the bull/bear trap setup is ignored.
Trap Wick-to-Body Ratio:
This input measures the ratio of the confirmation candle’s wick size to its body size for bulltrap and beartrap setups. Lower values require a larger body compared to the wick, meaning the confirmation candle must close more decisively. If the ratio is above the threshold set by the user, the confirmation candle for a bulltrap/beartrap setup is considered valid.
For example, if the wick is 10 points and the body is 10 points, the ratio is 1.0 (10 / 10). If the wick is 10 points and the body is 20 points, the ratio is 0.5 (10 / 20).
🔹Beartrap Setup – Manipulation Candle + Key Level
A beartrap setup forms when a bearish Manipulation Candle touches a toggled-on key level under the “Key Levels Used” section. The candle does not need to close above or below the level, it only needs to touch it. After this bearish MC forms, a confirmation candle must close back above the MC’s high during an enabled session under the “Sessions Used” section. The sweep or initial touch can occur before or outside the session, but the confirmation candle must close within an active session window.
To confirm the setup, the following conditions must be met:
The confirmation candle must close within the limit set by the Candles Between Confirmation input.
Its wick-to-body ratio must be less than or equal to the Trap Wick-to-Body Ratio input
Once these conditions are met and price is above the 1-hour 50 EMA, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the close of the confirmation candle
Stop Loss: At the low of the confirmation candle
Take Profit: Equal distance above the entry, measured 1:1 from the candle’s body and scaled by the TP Multiplier
In this example, a bearish Manipulation Candle touches the Daily Open level before price reverses and a confirmation candle closes above it. The confirmation candle occurs during the Asia Session, has a strong body with minimal wicks, meeting the Trap Wick-to-Body Ratio requirement, and it forms just two candles after the bearish MC which is within the limit set by the Candles Between Confirmation input.
🔹Bulltrap Setup – Manipulation Candle + Key Level
A bulltrap setup forms when a bullish Manipulation Candle touches a toggled-on key level under the “Key Levels Used” section. The MC does not need to close above or below the level, it only needs to touch it. After this bullish MC forms, a confirmation candle must close back below the MC’s low during an enabled session under the “Sessions Used” section. The initial key level touch from the MC can occur before or outside the session, but the confirmation candle must close within an active session window.
To confirm the setup, the following conditions must be met:
The confirmation candle must close within the limit set by the Candles Between Confirmation input.
Its wick-to-body ratio must be less than or equal to the Trap Wick-to-Body Ratio input.
Once these conditions are met and price is below the 1-hour 50 EMA, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the close of the confirmation candle
Stop Loss: At the high of the confirmation candle
Take Profit: Equal distance below the entry, measured 1:1 from the candle’s body and scaled by the TP Multiplier
In this example, a bullish Manipulation Candle touches the Daily Open level before price reverses and a confirmation candle closes below it. The confirmation candle forms during the NY AM Session, has a strong body with minimal wicks that meet the Trap Wick-to-Body Ratio requirement, and it appears two candles after the bullish MC which is within the limit defined by the Candles Between Confirmation input.
🔹Long Setup – Almost Manipulation Candle + Key Level
A long setup forms when a bullish Almost Manipulation Candle (AMC) touches a toggled-on key level under the “Key Levels Used” section and closes above it during a toggled-on session from the “Sessions Used” section. After the candle closes and price is above the 1-hour 50 EMA, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the close of the bullish Almost Manipulation Candle
Stop Loss: At the low of the same candle
Take Profit: Equal distance above the entry, based on the TP Multiplier
In this example, a bullish AMC touches the Daily Open during the NYSE Session and closes above the level.
🔹Short Setup – Almost Manipulation Candle + Key Level
A short setup forms when a bearish Almost Manipulation Candle (AMC) touches a toggled-on key level under the “Key Levels Used” section and closes below it during a toggled-on session from the “Sessions Used” section. After the candle closes and price is below the 1-hour 50 EMA, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the close of the bearish Almost Manipulation Candle
Stop Loss: At the high of the same candle
Take Profit: Equal distance below the entry, based on the TP Multiplier
In this example, a bearish AMC touches the Midnight Open during the NY AM Session and closes below the level.
🔹Beartrap Setup – Almost Manipulation Candle + Key Level
A beartrap setup forms when a bearish Almost Manipulation Candle (AMC) touches a toggled-on key level under the “Key Levels Used” section. The candle does not need to close above or below the level, it only needs to touch it. After this bearish AMC forms, a confirmation candle must close back above the AMC’s high during an enabled session under the “Sessions Used” section. The initial touch can occur before or outside the session, but the confirmation candle must close within an active session window.
To confirm the setup, the following conditions must be met:
The confirmation candle must close within the limit set by the Candles Between Confirmation input.
Its wick-to-body ratio must be less than or equal to the Trap Wick-to-Body Ratio input.
Once these conditions are met and price is above the 1-hour 50 EMA, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the close of the confirmation candle
Stop Loss: At the low of the confirmation candle
Take Profit: Equal distance above the entry, measured 1:1 from the candle’s body and scaled by the TP Multiplier
In this example, a bearish AMC touches the Midnight Open before price reverses and a confirmation candle closes above it. The confirmation candle forms during the London Session, has a large body with minimal wicks that meet the Trap Wick-to-Body Ratio requirement, and appears seven candles after the bearish AMC which is within the Candles Between Confirmation limit (10 by default).
🔹Bulltrap Setup – Almost Manipulation Candle + Key Level
A bulltrap setup forms when a bullish AMC touches a toggled-on key level under the “Key Levels Used” section. The candle does not need to close above or below the level; it only needs to touch it. After this bullish AMC forms, a confirmation candle must close back below the AMC’s low during an enabled session under the “Sessions Used” section. The initial touch can occur before or outside the session, but the confirmation candle must close within an active session window.
To confirm the setup, the following conditions must be met:
The confirmation candle must close within the limit set by the Candles Between Confirmation input.
Its wick-to-body ratio must be less than or equal to the Trap Wick-to-Body Ratio input.
Once these conditions are met and price is below the 1-hour 50 EMA, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the close of the confirmation candle
Stop Loss: At the high of the confirmation candle
Take Profit: Equal distance below the entry, measured 1:1 from the candle’s body and scaled by the TP Multiplier
In this example, a bullish AMC touches the NY Lunch Session Low before price reverses and a confirmation candle closes below it. The confirmation candle forms during the Asia Session, has a strong body with minimal wicks that meet the Trap Wick-to-Body Ratio requirement, and appears six candles after the bullish AMC which is within the Candles Between Confirmation limit.
🔹Long Setup – Manipulation Candle + Fair Value Gap
A long setup forms when a bullish Manipulation Candle touches a bullish higher timeframe Fair Value Gap (FVG) from one of the two higher timeframe inputs under the “Fair Value Gaps” section. The candle must close during an enabled session under the “Sessions Used” section. After the candle closes and price is above the 1-hour 50 EMA, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the close of the bullish Manipulation Candle
Stop Loss: At the low of the same candle
Take Profit: Equal distance above the entry, scaled by the TP Multiplier
In this example, a bullish MC taps into a bullish 1-hour FVG during the Asia Session.
🔹Short Setup – Manipulation Candle + Fair Value Gap
A short setup forms when a bearish Manipulation Candle touches a bearish higher timeframe FVG from one of the two selected higher timeframe inputs under the “Fair Value Gaps” section. The candle must also close during an enabled session under the “Sessions Used” section. After the candle closes and price is below the 1-hour 50 EMA, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the close of the bearish Manipulation Candle
Stop Loss: At the high of the same candle
Take Profit: Equal distance below the entry, scaled by the TP Multiplier
In this example, a bearish MC taps a bearish 1-hour FVG during the Asia Session.
🔹Beartrap Setup – Manipulation Candle + Fair Value Gap
A beartrap setup forms when a bearish Manipulation Candle touches a bullish or bearish higher timeframe FVG from one of the two higher timeframe inputs under the “Higher Timeframe FVG Settings” section. After the bearish MC forms, price must reverse and a confirmation candle must close above the bearish MC’s high during an enabled session under the “Sessions Used” section. The initial touch of the FVG can occur before or outside the session, but the confirmation candle must close within an active session window.
To confirm the setup, the following conditions must be met:
The confirmation candle must close within the limit set by the Candles Between Confirmation input.
Its wick-to-body ratio must be less than or equal to the Trap Wick-to-Body Ratio input.
Once these conditions are met and price is above the 1-hour 50 EMA, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the close of the confirmation candle
Stop Loss: At the low of the confirmation candle
Take Profit: Equal distance above the entry, measured 1:1 from the candle’s body and scaled by the TP Multiplier
In this example, a bearish MC taps a 1-hour bearish FVG, price reverses, and a confirmation candle closes above the bearish MC’s high. The confirmation candle forms during the London Session, has a strong body with minimal wicks that meet the Trap Wick-to-Body Ratio requirement, and appears two candles after the bearish MC which is within the Candles Between Confirmation limit.
🔹Bulltrap Setup – Manipulation Candle + Fair Value Gap
A bulltrap setup forms when a bullish MC touches a bearish or bullish higher timeframeFVG from one of the two higher timeframe inputs under the “Higher Timeframe FVG Settings” section. After the bullish MC forms, price must reverse and a confirmation candle must close below the MC’s low during an enabled session under the “Sessions Used” section. The initial touch of the FVG can occur before or outside the session, but the confirmation candle must close within an active session window.
To confirm the setup, the following conditions must be met:
The confirmation candle must close within the limit set by the Candles Between Confirmation input.
Its wick-to-body ratio must be less than or equal to the Trap Wick-to-Body Ratio input.
Once these conditions are met and price is below the 1-hour 50 EMA, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the close of the confirmation candle
Stop Loss: At the high of the confirmation candle
Take Profit: Equal distance below the entry, measured 1:1 from the candle’s body and scaled by the TP Multiplier
In this example, a bullish MC taps a 4-hour bearish FVG, price reverses, and a confirmation candle closes below the bullish MC’s low. The confirmation candle forms during the NY PM Session, has a strong body with minimal wicks that meet the Trap Wick-to-Body Ratio requirement, and appears six candles after the bullish MC which is within the Candles Between Confirmation limit.
🔹Long Setup – Almost Manipulation Candle + Fair Value Gap
A long setup forms when a bullish AMC touches a bullish higher timeframe FVG from one of the two higher timeframe inputs under the “Fair Value Gaps” section. The candle must close during an enabled session under the “Sessions Used” section. After the candle closes and price is above the 1-hour 50 EMA, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the close of the bullish AMC
Stop Loss: At the low of the same candle
Take Profit: Equal distance above the entry, scaled by the TP Multiplier
In this example, a bullish AMC taps into a bullish 1-hour FVG during the London Session.
🔹Short Setup – Almost Manipulation Candle + Fair Value Gap
A short setup forms when a bearish AMC touches a bearish higher timeframe FVG from one of the two selected higher timeframe inputs under the “Fair Value Gaps” section. The candle must also close during an enabled session under the “Sessions Used” section. After the candle closes and price is below the 1-hour 50 EMA, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the close of the bearish AMC
Stop Loss: At the high of the same candle
Take Profit: Equal distance below the entry, scaled by the TP Multiplier
In this example, a bearish AMC taps a bearish 1-hour FVG during the NY PM Session.
🔹Beartrap Setup – Almost Manipulation Candle + Fair Value Gap
A beartrap setup forms when a bearish AMC touches a bullish or bearish higher timeframe FVG from one of the two higher timeframe inputs under the “Higher Timeframe FVG Settings” section. After the bearish AMC forms, price must reverse and a confirmation candle must close above the bearish AMC’s high during an enabled session under the “Sessions Used” section. The initial touch of the FVG can occur before or outside the session, but the confirmation candle must close within an active session window.
To confirm the setup, the following conditions must be met:
The confirmation candle must close within the limit set by the Candles Between Confirmation input.
Its wick-to-body ratio must be less than or equal to the Trap Wick-to-Body Ratio input.
Once these conditions are met and price is above the 1-hour 50 EMA, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the close of the confirmation candle
Stop Loss: At the low of the confirmation candle
Take Profit: Equal distance above the entry, measured 1:1 from the candle’s body and scaled by the TP Multiplier
In this example, a bearish AMC taps a 4-hour bearish FVG, price reverses, and a confirmation candle closes above the bearish AMC’s high. The confirmation candle forms during the NY PM Session, has a strong body with minimal wicks that meet the Trap Wick-to-Body Ratio requirement, and appears seven candles after the bearish AMC, which is within the Candles Between Confirmation limit.
🔹Bulltrap Setup – Almost Manipulation Candle + Fair Value Gap
A bulltrap setup forms when a bullish AMC touches a bearish or bullish higher timeframe FVG from one of the two higher timeframe inputs under the “Higher Timeframe FVG Settings” section. After the bullish AMC forms, price must reverse and a confirmation candle must close below the AMC’s low during an enabled session under the “Sessions Used” section. The initial touch of the FVG can occur before or outside the session, but the confirmation candle must close within an active session window.
To confirm the setup, the following conditions must be met:
The confirmation candle must close within the limit set by the Candles Between Confirmation input.
Its wick-to-body ratio must be less than or equal to the Trap Wick-to-Body Ratio input.
Once these conditions are met and price is below the 1-hour 50 EMA, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the close of the confirmation candle
Stop Loss: At the high of the confirmation candle
Take Profit: Equal distance below the entry, measured 1:1 from the candle’s body and scaled by the TP Multiplier
In this example, a bullish AMC taps a 1-hour bullish FVG, price reverses, and a confirmation candle closes below the bullish AMC’s low. The confirmation candle forms during the Asia Session, has a strong body with minimal wicks that meet the Trap Wick-to-Body Ratio requirement, and appears six candles after the bullish AMC, which is within the Candles Between Confirmation limit.
🔹Signal Style Customization
The Manipulation Model indicator provides full visual customization for all signal elements, allowing users to easily adjust the appearance of entry, stop loss, and take profit labels.
Label Colors:
Users can customize the label color for Long Setups (Long and Beartrap) and Short Setups (Short and Bulltrap).
Long and Beartrap setups share the same label color.
Short and Bulltrap setups share the same label color.
Label text color can also be customized and applied globally to all signal labels.
Stop Loss (SL) and Take Profit (TP) Labels:
The SL and TP label colors can be customized independently.
Users can toggle SL Labels and TP Labels on or off. When turned off, the corresponding labels are hidden, but their levels remain active on the chart.
Entry, Stop Loss, and Take Profit Lines:
Each of these lines can be individually toggled on or off.
Entry Line: Marks the entry price level.
Stop Loss Line: Displays the SL level derived from each setup’s logic.
Take Profit Line: Displays the TP level calculated using the Take Profit Multiplier setting.
Users can also toggle the labels for each line on or off and adjust the color for each line type independently.
WIN RATE DASHBOARD:
The Win Rate Dashboard gives traders a quick way to see the recent performance of their enabled setups. It automatically calculates and displays win rates for each signal type turned on under the “General Configuration” section, based on the sessions and key levels currently active in the settings.
The dashboard updates in real time, showing both the win rate percentage and total trade count for all enabled signal types combined. It looks back at a set number of bars to calculate results, providing a simple performance snapshot directly on your chart.
How It Works:
When a signal triggers, the indicator tracks whether price first reaches the Take Profit (TP) or Stop Loss (SL) level.
A winning trade is recorded when the take profit is hit before the stop loss.
A losing trade is recorded when the stop loss is hit before the take profit.
The win rate = (Winning Trades / Total Trades) x 100
🔹Dashboard Customization:
Users can adjust the dashboard’s appearance with the following settings:
Background Color
Frame Color
Border Color
Text Color
You can also toggle the dashboard on or off from the settings menu. It appears in the top-right corner of the chart by default and its position cannot be changed.
🔹Disclaimer:
The Win Rate Dashboard provides historical performance data based on the signals and conditions you’ve enabled. These results are calculated from past bars and are not indicative of future performance or profitability.
ALERTS:
The Manipulation Model indicator includes full alert functionality powered by AnyAlert(), allowing users to receive notifications for all major setups and level breaks in real time.
Users can choose exactly which alerts they want to receive under the “Alerts” section of the settings. Once your preferred alerts are toggled on, you can create a TradingView alert using the AnyAlert() condition. This will automatically trigger alerts for all selected events as they occur on your chart.
Available Alerts:
Long Setup
Short Setup
Bulltrap Setup
Beartrap Setup
Manipulation Candle
Almost Manipulation Candle
Previous Day High/Low Break
Current Day Open Break
Previous Week High/Low Break
Current Week Open Break
Previous Month High/Low Break
Current Month Open Break
Asia Session High/Low Break
London Session High/Low Break
NY AM Session High/Low Break
NYSE Session High/Low Break
London Close Session High/Low Break
NY PM Session High/Low Break
Midnight Open Break
To receive alerts:
Open the alert creation window in TradingView
Select “Manipulation Model ” as the condition
Choose AnyAlert() from the dropdown
Create the alert
IMPORTANT NOTES:
TradingView has limitations when running features on multiple timeframes, which can result in the following restriction:
Computation Error:
The computation of using MTF features is very intensive on TradingView. This can sometimes cause calculation timeouts. When this occurs, simply force the recalculation by modifying one indicator’s settings or by removing the indicator and adding it to your chart again.
UNIQUENESS:
The Manipulation Model is unique because every setup type is fully rule-based and tied to strict structural logic. Traders can control exactly how signals form by selecting which candle types are used, which key levels and sessions are active, and whether entries trigger from Key Levels, Fair Value Gaps, or both. All setups use objective rules for confirmation, wick-to-body ratio, and higher timeframe bias. The indicator also provides full customization for visuals, alerts, and trade parameters like TP and SL multipliers. A built-in Win Rate Dashboard tracks real-time performance for all enabled setup types based on the user’s active sessions and signal filters. Together, these features make it a complete, mechanical implementation of the Funded Brothers Manipulation Model and it works across all asset classes including stocks, crypto, forex, and futures.
Algorithm Predator - ProAlgorithm Predator - Pro: Advanced Multi-Agent Reinforcement Learning Trading System
Algorithm Predator - Pro combines four specialized market microstructure agents with a state-of-the-art reinforcement learning framework . Unlike traditional indicator mashups, this system implements genuine machine learning to automatically discover which detection strategies work best in current market conditions and adapts continuously without manual intervention.
Core Innovation: Rather than forcing traders to interpret conflicting signals, this system uses 15 different multi-armed bandit algorithms and a full reinforcement learning stack (Q-Learning, TD(λ) with eligibility traces, and Policy Gradient with REINFORCE) to learn optimal agent selection policies. The result is a self-improving system that gets smarter with every trade.
Target Users: Swing traders, day traders, and algorithmic traders seeking systematic signal generation with mathematical rigor. Suitable for stocks, forex, crypto, and futures on liquid instruments (>100k daily volume).
Why These Components Are Combined
The Fundamental Problem
No single indicator works consistently across all market regimes. What works in trending markets fails in ranging conditions. Traditional solutions force traders to manually switch indicators (slow, error-prone) or interpret all signals simultaneously (cognitive overload).
This system solves the problem through automated meta-learning: Deploy multiple specialized agents designed for specific market microstructure conditions, then use reinforcement learning to discover which agent (or combination) performs best in real-time.
Why These Specific Four Agents?
The four agents provide orthogonal failure mode coverage —each agent's weakness is another's strength:
Spoofing Detector - Optimal in consolidation/manipulation; fails in trending markets (hedged by Exhaustion Detector)
Exhaustion Detector - Optimal at trend climax; fails in range-bound markets (hedged by Liquidity Void)
Liquidity Void - Optimal pre-breakout compression; fails in established trends (hedged by Mean Reversion)
Mean Reversion - Optimal in low volatility; fails in strong trends (hedged by Spoofing Detector)
This creates complete market state coverage where at least one agent should perform well in any condition. The bandit system identifies which one without human intervention.
Why Reinforcement Learning vs. Simple Voting?
Traditional consensus systems have fatal flaws: equal weighting assumes all agents are equally reliable (false), static thresholds don't adapt, and no learning means past mistakes repeat indefinitely.
Reinforcement learning solves this through the exploration-exploitation tradeoff: Continuously test underused agents (exploration) while primarily relying on proven winners (exploitation). Over time, the system builds a probability distribution over agent quality reflecting actual market performance.
Mathematical Foundation: Multi-armed bandit problem from probability theory, where each agent is an "arm" with unknown reward distribution. The goal is to maximize cumulative reward while efficiently learning each arm's true quality.
The Four Trading Agents: Technical Explanation
Agent 1: 🎭 Spoofing Detector (Institutional Manipulation Detection)
Theoretical Basis: Market microstructure theory on order flow toxicity and information asymmetry. Based on research by Easley, López de Prado, and O'Hara on high-frequency trading manipulation.
What It Detects:
1. Iceberg Orders (Hidden Liquidity Absorption)
Method: Monitors volume spikes (>2.5× 20-period average) with minimal price movement (<0.3× ATR)
Formula: score += (close > open ? -2.5 : 2.5) when volume > vol_avg × 2.5 AND abs(close - open) / ATR < 0.3
Interpretation: Large volume without price movement indicates institutional absorption (buying) or distribution (selling) using hidden orders
Signal Logic: Contrarian—fade false breakouts caused by institutional manipulation
2. Spoofing Patterns (Fake Liquidity via Layering)
Method: Analyzes candlestick wick-to-body ratios during volume spikes
Formula: if upper_wick > body × 2 AND volume_spike: score += 2.0
Mechanism: Spoofing creates large wicks (orders pulled before execution) with volume evidence
Signal Logic: Wick direction indicates trapped participants; trade against the failed move
3. Post-Manipulation Reversals
Method: Tracks volume decay after manipulation events
Formula: if volume > vol_avg × 3 AND volume / volume < 0.3: score += (close > open ? -1.5 : 1.5)
Interpretation: Sharp volume drop after manipulation indicates exhaustion of manipulative orders
Why It Works: Institutional manipulation creates detectable microstructure anomalies. While retail traders see "mysterious reversals," this agent quantifies the order flow patterns causing them.
Parameter: i_spoof (sensitivity 0.5-2.0) - Controls detection threshold
Best Markets: Consolidations before breakouts, London/NY overlap windows, stocks with institutional ownership >70%
Agent 2: ⚡ Exhaustion Detector (Momentum Failure Analysis)
Theoretical Basis: Technical analysis divergence theory combined with VPIN reversals from market microstructure literature.
What It Detects:
1. Price-RSI Divergence (Momentum Deceleration)
Method: Compares 5-bar price ROC against RSI change
Formula: if price_roc > 5% AND rsi_current < rsi : score += 1.8
Mathematics: Second derivative detecting inflection points
Signal Logic: When price makes higher highs but momentum makes lower highs, expect mean reversion
2. Volume Exhaustion (Buying/Selling Climax)
Method: Identifies strong price moves (>5% ROC) with declining volume (<-20% volume ROC)
Formula: if price_roc > 5 AND vol_roc < -20: score += 2.5
Interpretation: Price extension without volume support indicates retail chasing while institutions exit
3. Momentum Deceleration (Acceleration Analysis)
Method: Compares recent 3-bar momentum to prior 3-bar momentum
Formula: deceleration = abs(mom1) < abs(mom2) × 0.5 where momentum significant (> ATR)
Signal Logic: When rate of price change decelerates significantly, anticipate directional shift
Why It Works: Momentum is lagging, but momentum divergence is leading. By comparing momentum's rate of change to price, this agent detects "weakening conviction" before reversals become obvious.
Parameter: i_momentum (sensitivity 0.5-2.0)
Best Markets: Strong trends reaching climax, parabolic moves, instruments with high retail participation
Agent 3: 💧 Liquidity Void Detector (Breakout Anticipation)
Theoretical Basis: Market liquidity theory and order book dynamics. Based on research into "liquidity holes" and volatility compression preceding expansion.
What It Detects:
1. Bollinger Band Squeeze (Volatility Compression)
Method: Monitors Bollinger Band width relative to 50-period average
Formula: bb_width = (upper_band - lower_band) / middle_band; triggers when < 0.6× average
Mathematical Foundation: Regression to the mean—low volatility precedes high volatility
Signal Logic: When volatility compresses AND cumulative delta shows directional bias, anticipate breakout
2. Volume Profile Gaps (Thin Liquidity Zones)
Method: Identifies sharp volume transitions indicating few limit orders
Formula: if volume < vol_avg × 0.5 AND volume < vol_avg × 0.5 AND volume > vol_avg × 1.5
Interpretation: Sudden volume drop after spike indicates price moved through order book to low-opposition area
Signal Logic: Price accelerates through low-liquidity zones
3. Stop Hunts (Liquidity Grabs Before Reversals)
Method: Detects new 20-bar highs/lows with immediate reversal and rejection wick
Formula: if new_high AND close < high - (high - low) × 0.6: score += 3.0
Mechanism: Market makers push price to trigger stop-loss clusters, then reverse
Signal Logic: Enter reversal after stop-hunt completes
Why It Works: Order book theory shows price moves fastest through zones with minimal liquidity. By identifying these zones before major moves, this agent provides early entry for high-reward breakouts.
Parameter: i_liquidity (sensitivity 0.5-2.0)
Best Markets: Range-bound pre-breakout setups, volatility compression zones, instruments prone to gap moves
Agent 4: 📊 Mean Reversion (Statistical Arbitrage Engine)
Theoretical Basis: Statistical arbitrage theory, Ornstein-Uhlenbeck mean-reverting processes, and pairs trading methodology applied to single instruments.
What It Detects:
1. Z-Score Extremes (Standard Deviation Analysis)
Method: Calculates price distance from 20-period and 50-period SMAs in standard deviation units
Formula: zscore_20 = (close - SMA20) / StdDev(50)
Statistical Interpretation: Z-score >2.0 means price is 2 standard deviations above mean (97.5th percentile)
Trigger Logic: if abs(zscore_20) > 2.0: score += zscore_20 > 0 ? -1.5 : 1.5 (fade extremes)
2. Ornstein-Uhlenbeck Process (Mean-Reverting Stochastic Model)
Method: Models price as mean-reverting stochastic process: dx = θ(μ - x)dt + σdW
Implementation: Calculates spread = close - SMA20, then z-score of spread vs. spread distribution
Formula: ou_signal = (spread - spread_mean) / spread_std
Interpretation: Measures "tension" pulling price back to equilibrium
3. Correlation Breakdown (Regime Change Detection)
Method: Compares 50-period price-volume correlation to 10-period correlation
Formula: corr_breakdown = abs(typical_corr - recent_corr) > 0.5
Enhancement: if corr_breakdown AND abs(zscore_20) > 1.0: score += zscore_20 > 0 ? -1.2 : 1.2
Why It Works: Mean reversion is the oldest quantitative strategy (1970s pairs trading at Morgan Stanley). While simple, it remains effective because markets exhibit periodic equilibrium-seeking behavior. This agent applies rigorous statistical testing to identify when mean reversion probability is highest.
Parameter: i_statarb (sensitivity 0.5-2.0)
Best Markets: Range-bound instruments, low-volatility periods (VIX <15), algo-dominated markets (forex majors, index futures)
Multi-Armed Bandit System: 15 Algorithms Explained
What Is a Multi-Armed Bandit Problem?
Origin: Named after slot machines ("one-armed bandits"). Imagine facing multiple slot machines, each with unknown payout rates. How do you maximize winnings?
Formal Definition: K arms (agents), each with unknown reward distribution with mean μᵢ. Goal: Maximize cumulative reward over T trials. Challenge: Balance exploration (trying uncertain arms to learn quality) vs. exploitation (using known-best arm for immediate reward).
Trading Application: Each agent is an "arm." After each trade, receive reward (P&L). Must decide which agent to trust for next signal.
Algorithm Categories
Bayesian Approaches (probabilistic, optimal for stationary environments):
Thompson Sampling
Bootstrapped Thompson Sampling
Discounted Thompson Sampling
Frequentist Approaches (confidence intervals, deterministic):
UCB1
UCB1-Tuned
KL-UCB
SW-UCB (Sliding Window)
D-UCB (Discounted)
Adversarial Approaches (robust to non-stationary environments):
EXP3-IX
Hedge
FPL-Gumbel
Reinforcement Learning Approaches (leverage learned state-action values):
Q-Values (from Q-Learning)
Policy Network (from Policy Gradient)
Simple Baseline:
Epsilon-Greedy
Softmax
Key Algorithm Details
Thompson Sampling (DEFAULT - RECOMMENDED)
Theoretical Foundation: Bayesian decision theory with conjugate priors. Published by Thompson (1933), rediscovered for bandits by Chapelle & Li (2011).
How It Works:
Model each agent's reward distribution as Beta(α, β) where α = wins, β = losses
Each step, sample from each agent's beta distribution: θᵢ ~ Beta(αᵢ, βᵢ)
Select agent with highest sample: argmaxᵢ θᵢ
Update winner's distribution after observing outcome
Mathematical Properties:
Optimality: Achieves logarithmic regret O(K log T) (proven optimal)
Bayesian: Maintains probability distribution over true arm means
Automatic Balance: High uncertainty → more exploration; high certainty → exploitation
⚠️ CRITICAL APPROXIMATION: This is a pseudo-random approximation of true Thompson Sampling. True implementation requires random number generation from beta distributions, which Pine Script doesn't provide. This version uses Box-Muller transform with market data (price/volume decimal digits) as entropy source. While not mathematically pure, it maintains core exploration-exploitation balance and learns agent preferences effectively.
When To Use: Best all-around choice. Handles non-stationary markets reasonably well, balances exploration naturally, highly sample-efficient.
UCB1 (Upper Confidence Bound)
Formula: UCB_i = reward_mean_i + sqrt(2 × ln(total_pulls) / pulls_i)
Interpretation: First term (exploitation) + second term (exploration bonus for less-tested arms)
Mathematical Properties:
Deterministic : Always selects same arm given same state
Regret Bound: O(K log T) — same optimality as Thompson Sampling
Interpretable: Can visualize confidence intervals
When To Use: Prefer deterministic behavior, want to visualize uncertainty, stable markets
EXP3-IX (Exponential Weights - Adversarial)
Theoretical Foundation: Adversarial bandit algorithm. Assumes environment may be actively hostile (worst-case analysis).
How It Works:
Maintain exponential weights: w_i = exp(η × cumulative_reward_i)
Select agent with probability proportional to weights: p_i = (1-γ)w_i/Σw_j + γ/K
After outcome, update with importance weighting: estimated_reward = observed_reward / p_i
Mathematical Properties:
Adversarial Regret: O(sqrt(TK log K)) even if environment is adversarial
No Assumptions: Doesn't assume stationary or stochastic reward distributions
Robust: Works even when optimal arm changes continuously
When To Use: Extreme non-stationarity, don't trust reward distribution assumptions, want robustness over efficiency
KL-UCB (Kullback-Leibler Upper Confidence Bound)
Theoretical Foundation: Uses KL-divergence instead of Hoeffding bounds. Tighter confidence intervals.
Formula (conceptual): Find largest q such that: n × KL(p||q) ≤ ln(t) + 3×ln(ln(t))
Mathematical Properties:
Tighter Bounds: KL-divergence adapts to reward distribution shape
Asymptotically Optimal: Better constant factors than UCB1
Computationally Intensive: Requires iterative binary search (15 iterations)
When To Use: Maximum sample efficiency needed, willing to pay computational cost, long-term trading (>500 bars)
Q-Values & Policy Network (RL-Based Selection)
Unique Feature: Instead of treating agents as black boxes with scalar rewards, these algorithms leverage the full RL state representation .
Q-Values Selection:
Uses learned Q-values: Q(state, agent_i) from Q-Learning
Selects agent via softmax over Q-values for current market state
Advantage: Selects based on state-conditional quality (which agent works best in THIS market state)
Policy Network Selection:
Uses neural network policy: π(agent | state, θ) from Policy Gradient
Direct policy over agents given market features
Advantage: Can learn non-linear relationships between market features and agent quality
When To Use: After 200+ RL updates (Q-Values) or 500+ updates (Policy Network) when models converged
Machine Learning & Reinforcement Learning Stack
Why Both Bandits AND Reinforcement Learning?
Critical Distinction:
Bandits treat agents as contextless black boxes: "Agent 2 has 60% win rate"
Reinforcement Learning adds state context: "Agent 2 has 60% win rate WHEN trend_score > 2 and RSI < 40"
Power of Combination: Bandits provide fast initial learning with minimal assumptions. RL provides state-dependent policies for superior long-term performance.
Component 1: Q-Learning (Value-Based RL)
Algorithm: Temporal Difference Learning with Bellman equation.
State Space: 54 discrete states formed from:
trend_state = {0: bearish, 1: neutral, 2: bullish} (3 values)
volatility_state = {0: low, 1: normal, 2: high} (3 values)
RSI_state = {0: oversold, 1: neutral, 2: overbought} (3 values)
volume_state = {0: low, 1: high} (2 values)
Total states: 3 × 3 × 3 × 2 = 54 states
Action Space: 5 actions (No trade, Agent 1, Agent 2, Agent 3, Agent 4)
Total state-action pairs: 54 × 5 = 270 Q-values
Bellman Equation:
Q(s,a) ← Q(s,a) + α ×
Parameters:
α (learning rate): 0.01-0.50, default 0.10 - Controls step size for updates
γ (discount factor): 0.80-0.99, default 0.95 - Values future rewards
ε (exploration): 0.01-0.30, default 0.10 - Probability of random action
Update Mechanism:
Position opens with state s, action a (selected agent)
Every bar position is open: Calculate floating P&L → scale to reward
Perform online TD update
When position closes: Perform terminal update with final reward
Gradient Clipping: TD errors clipped to ; Q-values clipped to for stability.
Why It Works: Q-Learning learns "quality" of each agent in each market state through trial and error. Over time, builds complete state-action value function enabling optimal state-dependent agent selection.
Component 2: TD(λ) Learning (Temporal Difference with Eligibility Traces)
Enhancement Over Basic Q-Learning: Credit assignment across multiple time steps.
The Problem TD(λ) Solves:
Position opens at t=0
Market moves favorably at t=3
Position closes at t=8
Question: Which earlier decisions contributed to success?
Basic Q-Learning: Only updates Q(s₈, a₈) ← reward
TD(λ): Updates ALL visited state-action pairs with decayed credit
Eligibility Trace Formula:
e(s,a) ← γ × λ × e(s,a) for all s,a (decay all traces)
e(s_current, a_current) ← 1 (reset current trace)
Q(s,a) ← Q(s,a) + α × TD_error × e(s,a) (update all with trace weight)
Lambda Parameter (λ): 0.5-0.99, default 0.90
λ=0: Pure 1-step TD (only immediate next state)
λ=1: Full Monte Carlo (entire episode)
λ=0.9: Balance (recommended)
Why Superior: Dramatically faster learning for multi-step tasks. Q-Learning requires many episodes to propagate rewards backwards; TD(λ) does it in one.
Component 3: Policy Gradient (REINFORCE with Baseline)
Paradigm Shift: Instead of learning value function Q(s,a), directly learn policy π(a|s).
Policy Network Architecture:
Input: 12 market features
Hidden: None (linear policy)
Output: 5 actions (softmax distribution)
Total parameters: 12 features × 5 actions + 5 biases = 65 parameters
Feature Set (12 Features):
Price Z-score (close - SMA20) / ATR
Volume ratio (volume / vol_avg - 1)
RSI deviation (RSI - 50) / 50
Bollinger width ratio
Trend score / 4 (normalized)
VWAP deviation
5-bar price ROC
5-bar volume ROC
Range/ATR ratio - 1
Price-volume correlation (20-period)
Volatility ratio (ATR / ATR_avg - 1)
EMA50 deviation
REINFORCE Update Rule:
θ ← θ + α × ∇log π(a|s) × advantage
where advantage = reward - baseline (variance reduction)
Why Baseline? Raw rewards have high variance. Subtracting baseline (running average) centers rewards around zero, reducing gradient variance by 50-70%.
Learning Rate: 0.001-0.100, default 0.010 (much lower than Q-Learning because policy gradients have high variance)
Why Policy Gradient?
Handles 12 continuous features directly (Q-Learning requires discretization)
Naturally maintains exploration through probability distribution
Can converge to stochastic optimal policy
Component 4: Ensemble Meta-Learner (Stacking)
Architecture: Level-1 meta-learner combines Level-0 base learners (Q-Learning, TD(λ), Policy Gradient).
Three Meta-Learning Algorithms:
1. Simple Average (Baseline)
Final_prediction = (Q_prediction + TD_prediction + Policy_prediction) / 3
2. Weighted Vote (Reward-Based)
weight_i ← 0.95 × weight_i + 0.05 × (reward_i + 1)
3. Adaptive Weighting (Gradient-Based) — RECOMMENDED
Loss Function: L = (y_true - ŷ_ensemble)²
Gradient: ∂L/∂weight_i = -2 × (y_true - ŷ_ensemble) × agent_contribution_i
Updates weights via gradient descent with clipping and normalization
Why It Works: Unlike simple averaging, meta-learner discovers which base learner is most reliable in current regime. If Policy Gradient excels in trending markets while Q-Learning excels in ranging, meta-learner learns these patterns and weights accordingly.
Feature Importance Tracking
Purpose: Identify which of 12 features contribute most to successful predictions.
Update Rule: importance_i ← 0.95 × importance_i + 0.05 × |feature_i × reward|
Use Cases:
Feature selection: Drop low-importance features
Market regime detection: Importance shifts reveal regime changes
Agent tuning: If VWAP deviation has high importance, consider boosting agents using VWAP
RL Position Tracking System
Critical Innovation: Proper reinforcement learning requires tracking which decisions led to outcomes.
State Tracking (When Signal Validates):
active_rl_state ← current_market_state (0-53)
active_rl_action ← selected_agent (1-4)
active_rl_entry ← entry_price
active_rl_direction ← 1 (long) or -1 (short)
active_rl_bar ← current_bar_index
Online Updates (Every Bar Position Open):
floating_pnl = (close - entry) / entry × direction
reward = floating_pnl × 10 (scale to meaningful range)
reward = clip(reward, -5.0, 5.0)
Update Q-Learning, TD(λ), and Policy Gradient
Terminal Update (Position Close):
Final Q-Learning update (no next Q-value, terminal state)
Update meta-learner with final result
Update agent memory
Clear position tracking
Exit Conditions:
Time-based: ≥3 bars held (minimum hold period)
Stop-loss: 1.5% adverse move
Take-profit: 2.0% favorable move
Market Microstructure Filters
Why Microstructure Matters
Traditional technical analysis assumes fair, efficient markets. Reality: Markets have friction, manipulation, and information asymmetry. Microstructure filters detect when market structure indicates adverse conditions.
Filter 1: VPIN (Volume-Synchronized Probability of Informed Trading)
Theoretical Foundation: Easley, López de Prado, & O'Hara (2012). "Flow Toxicity and Liquidity in a High-Frequency World."
What It Measures: Probability that current order flow is "toxic" (informed traders with private information).
Calculation:
Classify volume as buy or sell (close > close = buy volume)
Calculate imbalance over 20 bars: VPIN = |Σ buy_volume - Σ sell_volume| / Σ total_volume
Compare to moving average: toxic = VPIN > VPIN_MA(20) × sensitivity
Interpretation:
VPIN < 0.3: Normal flow (uninformed retail)
VPIN 0.3-0.4: Elevated (smart money active)
VPIN > 0.4: Toxic flow (informed institutions dominant)
Filter Logic:
Block LONG when: VPIN toxic AND price rising (don't buy into institutional distribution)
Block SHORT when: VPIN toxic AND price falling (don't sell into institutional accumulation)
Adaptive Threshold: If VPIN toxic frequently, relax threshold; if rarely toxic, tighten threshold. Bounded .
Filter 2: Toxicity (Kyle's Lambda Approximation)
Theoretical Foundation: Kyle (1985). "Continuous Auctions and Insider Trading."
What It Measures: Price impact per unit volume — market depth and informed trading.
Calculation:
price_impact = (close - close ) / sqrt(Σ volume over 10 bars)
impact_zscore = (price_impact - impact_mean) / impact_std
toxicity = abs(impact_zscore)
Interpretation:
Low toxicity (<1.0): Deep liquid market, large orders absorbed easily
High toxicity (>2.0): Thin market or informed trading
Filter Logic: Block ALL SIGNALS when toxicity > threshold. Most dangerous when price breaks from VWAP with high toxicity.
Filter 3: Regime Filter (Counter-Trend Protection)
Purpose: Prevent counter-trend trades during strong trends.
Trend Scoring:
trend_score = 0
trend_score += close > EMA8 ? +1 : -1
trend_score += EMA8 > EMA21 ? +1 : -1
trend_score += EMA21 > EMA50 ? +1 : -1
trend_score += close > EMA200 ? +1 : -1
Range:
Regime Classification:
Strong Bull: trend_score ≥ +3 → Block all SHORT signals
Strong Bear: trend_score ≤ -3 → Block all LONG signals
Neutral: -2 ≤ trend_score ≤ +2 → Allow both directions
Filter 4: Liquidity Boost (Signal Enhancer)
Unique: Unlike other filters (which block), this amplifies signals during low liquidity.
Logic: if volume < vol_avg × 0.7: agent_scores × 1.2
Why It Works: Low liquidity often precedes explosive moves (breakouts). By increasing agent sensitivity during compression, system catches pre-breakout signals earlier.
Technical Implementation & Approximations
⚠️ Critical Approximations Required by Pine Script
1. Thompson Sampling: Pseudo-Random Beta Distribution
Academic Standard: True random sampling from beta distributions using cryptographic RNG
This Implementation: Box-Muller transform for normal distribution using market data (price/volume decimal digits) as entropy source, then scale to beta distribution mean/variance
Impact: Not cryptographically random, may have subtle biases in specific price ranges, but maintains correct mean and approximate variance. Sufficient for bandit agent selection.
2. VPIN: Simplified Volume Classification
Academic Standard: Lee-Ready algorithm or exchange-provided aggressor flags with tick-by-tick data
This Implementation: Bar-based classification: if close > close : buy_volume += volume
Impact: 10-15% precision loss. Works well in directional markets, misclassifies in choppy conditions. Still captures order flow imbalance signal.
3. Policy Gradient: Simplified Per-Action Updates
Academic Standard: Full softmax gradient updating all actions (selected action UP, others DOWN proportionally)
This Implementation: Only updates selected action's weights
Impact: Valid approximation for small action spaces (5 actions). Slower convergence than full softmax but still learns optimal policy.
4. Kyle's Lambda: Simplified Price Impact
Academic Standard: Regression over multiple time scales with signed order flow
This Implementation: price_impact = Δprice_10 / sqrt(Σvolume_10); z_score calculation
Impact: 15-20% precision loss. No proper signed order flow. Still detects informed trading signals at extremes (>2σ).
5. Other Simplifications:
Hawkes Process: Fixed exponential decay (0.9) not MLE-optimized
Entropy: Ratio approximation not true Shannon entropy H(X) = -Σ p(x)·log₂(p(x))
Feature Engineering: 12 features vs. potential 100+ with polynomial interactions
RL Hybrid Updates: Both online and terminal (non-standard but empirically effective)
Overall Precision Loss Estimate: 10-15% compared to academic implementations with institutional data feeds.
Practical Trade-off: For retail trading with OHLCV data, these approximations provide 90%+ of the edge while maintaining full transparency, zero latency, no external dependencies, and runs on any TradingView plan.
How to Use: Practical Guide
Initial Setup (5 Minutes)
Select Trading Mode: Start with "Balanced" for most users
Enable ML/RL System: Toggle to TRUE, select "Full Stack" ML Mode
Bandit Configuration: Algorithm: "Thompson Sampling", Mode: "Switch" or "Blend"
Microstructure Filters: Enable all four filters, enable "Adaptive Microstructure Thresholds"
Visual Settings: Enable dashboard (Top Right), enable all chart visuals
Learning Phase (First 50-100 Signals)
What To Monitor:
Agent Performance Table: Watch win rates develop (target >55%)
Bandit Weights: Should diverge from uniform (0.25 each) after 20-30 signals
RL Core Metrics: "RL Updates" should increase when position open
Filter Status: "Blocked" count indicates filter activity
Optimization Tips:
Too few signals: Lower min_confidence to 0.25, increase agent sensitivities to 1.1-1.2
Too many signals: Raise min_confidence to 0.35-0.40, decrease agent sensitivities to 0.8-0.9
One agent dominates (>70%): Consider "Lock Agent" feature
Signal Interpretation
Dashboard Signal Status:
⚪ WAITING FOR SIGNAL: No agent signaling
⏳ ANALYZING...: Agent signaling but not confirmed
🟡 CONFIRMING 2/3: Building confirmation (2 of 3 bars)
🟢 LONG ACTIVE : Validated long entry
🔴 SHORT ACTIVE : Validated short entry
Kill Zone Boxes: Entry price (triangle marker), Take Profit (Entry + 2.5× ATR), Stop Loss (Entry - 1.5× ATR). Risk:Reward = 1:1.67
Risk Management
Position Sizing:
Risk per trade = 1-2% of capital
Position size = (Capital × Risk%) / (Entry - StopLoss)
Stop-Loss Placement:
Initial: Entry ± 1.5× ATR (shown in kill zone)
Trailing: After 1:1 R:R achieved, move stop to breakeven
Take-Profit Strategy:
TP1 (2.5× ATR): Take 50% off
TP2 (Runner): Trail stop at 1× ATR or use opposite signal as exit
Memory Persistence
Why Save Memory: Every chart reload resets the system. Saving learned parameters preserves weeks of learning.
When To Save: After 200+ signals when agent weights stabilize
What To Save: From Memory Export panel, copy all alpha/beta/weight values and adaptive thresholds
How To Restore: Enable "Restore From Saved State", input all values into corresponding fields
What Makes This Original
Innovation 1: Genuine Multi-Armed Bandit Framework
This implements 15 mathematically rigorous bandit algorithms from academic literature (Thompson Sampling from Chapelle & Li 2011, UCB family from Auer et al. 2002, EXP3 from Auer et al. 2002, KL-UCB from Garivier & Cappé 2011). Each algorithm maintains proper state, updates according to proven theory, and converges to optimal behavior. This is real learning, not superficial parameter changes.
Innovation 2: Full Reinforcement Learning Stack
Beyond bandits learning which agent works best globally, RL learns which agent works best in each market state. After 500+ positions, system builds 54-state × 5-action value function (270 learned parameters) capturing context-dependent agent quality.
Innovation 3: Market Microstructure Integration
Combines retail technical analysis with institutional-grade microstructure metrics: VPIN from Easley, López de Prado, O'Hara (2012), Kyle's Lambda from Kyle (1985), Hawkes Processes from Hawkes (1971). These detect informed trading, manipulation, and liquidity dynamics invisible to technical analysis.
Innovation 4: Adaptive Threshold System
Dynamic quantile-based thresholds: Maintains histogram of each agent's score distribution (24 bins, exponentially decayed), calculates 80th percentile threshold from histogram. Agent triggers only when score exceeds its own learned quantile. Proper non-parametric density estimation automatically adapts to instrument volatility, agent behavior shifts, and market regime changes.
Innovation 5: Episodic Memory with Transfer Learning
Dual-layer architecture: Short-term memory (last 20 trades, fast adaptation) + Long-term memory (condensed episodes, historical patterns). Transfer mechanism consolidates knowledge when STM reaches threshold. Mimics hippocampus → neocortex consolidation in human memory.
Limitations & Disclaimers
General Limitations
No Predictive Guarantee: Pattern recognition ≠ prediction. Past performance ≠ future results.
Learning Period Required: Minimum 50-100 bars for reliable statistics. Initial performance may be suboptimal.
Overfitting Risk: System learns patterns in historical data. May not generalize to unprecedented conditions.
Approximation Limitations: See technical implementation section (10-15% precision loss vs. academic standards)
Single-Instrument Limitation: No multi-asset correlation, sector context, or VIX integration.
Forward-Looking Bias Disclaimer
CRITICAL TRANSPARENCY: The RL system uses an 8-bar forward-looking window for reward calculation.
What This Means: System learns from rewards incorporating future price information (bars 101-108 relative to entry at bar 100).
Why Acceptable:
✅ Signals do NOT look ahead: Entry decisions use only data ≤ entry bar
✅ Learning only: Forward data used for optimization, not signal generation
✅ Real-time mirrors backtest: In live trading, system learns identically
⚠️ Implication: Dashboard "Agent Win%" reflects this 8-bar evaluation. Real-time performance may differ slightly if positions held longer, slippage/fees not captured, or market microstructure changes.
Risk Warnings
No Guarantee of Profit: All trading involves risk of loss
System Failures: Bugs possible despite extensive testing
Market Conditions: Optimized for liquid markets (>100k daily volume). Performance degrades in illiquid instruments, major news events, flash crashes
Broker-Specific Issues: Execution slippage, commission/fees, overnight financing costs
Appropriate Use
This Indicator Is:
✅ Entry trigger system
✅ Risk management framework (stop/target)
✅ Adaptive agent selection engine
✅ Learning system that improves over time
This Indicator Is NOT:
❌ Complete trading strategy (requires position sizing, portfolio management)
❌ Replacement for fundamental analysis
❌ Guaranteed profit generator
❌ Suitable for complete beginners without training
Recommended Complementary Analysis: Market context (support/resistance), volume profile, fundamental catalysts, correlation with related instruments, broader market regime
Recommended Settings by Instrument
Stocks (Large Cap, >$1B):
Mode: Balanced | ML/RL: Enabled, Full Stack | Bandit: Thompson Sampling, Switch
Agent Sensitivity: Spoofing 1.0-1.2, Exhaustion 0.9-1.1, Liquidity 0.8-1.0, StatArb 1.1-1.3
Microstructure: All enabled, VPIN 1.2, Toxicity 1.5 | Timeframe: 15min-1H
Forex Majors (EURUSD, GBPUSD):
Mode: Balanced to Conservative | ML/RL: Enabled, Full Stack | Bandit: Thompson Sampling, Blend
Agent Sensitivity: Spoofing 0.8-1.0, Exhaustion 0.9-1.1, Liquidity 0.7-0.9, StatArb 1.2-1.5
Microstructure: All enabled, VPIN 1.0-1.1, Toxicity 1.3-1.5 | Timeframe: 5min-30min
Crypto (BTC, ETH):
Mode: Aggressive to Balanced | ML/RL: Enabled, Full Stack | Bandit: Thompson Sampling OR EXP3-IX
Agent Sensitivity: Spoofing 1.2-1.5, Exhaustion 1.1-1.3, Liquidity 1.2-1.5, StatArb 0.7-0.9
Microstructure: All enabled, VPIN 1.4-1.6, Toxicity 1.8-2.2 | Timeframe: 15min-4H
Futures (ES, NQ, CL):
Mode: Balanced | ML/RL: Enabled, Full Stack | Bandit: UCB1 or Thompson Sampling
Agent Sensitivity: All 1.0-1.2 (balanced)
Microstructure: All enabled, VPIN 1.1-1.3, Toxicity 1.4-1.6 | Timeframe: 5min-30min
Conclusion
Algorithm Predator - Pro synthesizes academic research from market microstructure theory, reinforcement learning, and multi-armed bandit algorithms. Unlike typical indicator mashups, this system implements 15 mathematically rigorous bandit algorithms, deploys a complete RL stack (Q-Learning, TD(λ), Policy Gradient), integrates institutional microstructure metrics (VPIN, Kyle's Lambda), adapts continuously through dual-layer memory and meta-learning, and provides full transparency on approximations and limitations.
The system is designed for serious algorithmic traders who understand that no indicator is perfect, but through proper machine learning, we can build systems that improve over time and adapt to changing markets without manual intervention.
Use responsibly. Risk disclosure applies. Past performance ≠ future results.
Taking you to school. — Dskyz, Trade with insight. Trade with anticipation.
Hedge Simulation Martingale v1
1. Overview & Strategy Logic
This script implements an automated, multi-position trading strategy that uses a Martingale-inspired approach to manage a series of entries. The core logic is as follows:
Initial Entry: The script enters a trade based on the direction of the previous bar's close. A green bar triggers a Long position; a red bar triggers a Short position.
Profit-Taking: A single, fixed-percentage profit target (Profit Percentage) is set for the entire trade. If reached, all positions are closed for a net profit.
Loss Management (Martingale Logic): If the price moves against the initial position and hits the fixed-percentage stop-loss (Loss Percentage), the script does not exit. Instead, it averages down by adding a new, larger position in the same direction. The size of the new position is determined by multiplying the previous position size by the First Multiplier.
Net Position Management: The script continuously calculates the net average entry price, a new combined profit target, and a new combined stop-loss based on all open positions. The goal is for a single favorable price move to recover all previous losses and hit the profit target.
2. Key Features
Visual Indicators:
Plots the Net Average Entry Price on the chart.
Plots dynamic Profit Target (TP) and Stop-Loss (SL) levels that update as new positions are added.
Displays entry signals (triangles) for the initial Long or Short trade.
Comprehensive Dashboard: A detailed table in the top-right corner shows real-time metrics, including:
Total historical Long/Short volume and PnL.
Current trade's investment, unrealized PnL, and position sizes.
Current position count, direction, and size.
Configurable Parameters:
Profit Percentage: The target profit percentage for the net position.
Loss Percentage: The stop-loss percentage that triggers a new entry.
Initial Position Size: The size of the first position in the series.
First Multiplier: The multiplier applied to the previous position size when averaging down.
Maximum Multiplier: A safety cap (commented out in the code but present) to prevent infinite scaling.
3. Intended Use & Purpose
This script is designed as a position management and tracking tool for traders who are experimenting with or actively using Martingale-style strategies. It is best used to:
Automate the complex calculations of average entry, combined TP/SL, and PnL for multiple entries.
Visually track the status of an ongoing series of positions.
Backtest the viability and risks of such a strategy on historical data.
4. ⚠️ Critical Risk Warning & Disclaimer
THIS STRATEGY CARRIES EXTREME FINANCIAL RISK. USE AT YOUR OWN RISK.
Unlimited Loss Potential: The Martingale strategy is infamous for its potential to generate unlimited losses. By continuously doubling down (or multiplying) on losing positions, a small adverse price move can lead to catastrophic losses that can exceed your account balance.
Margin Calls: The rapidly increasing position size can quickly deplete your margin, leading to a margin call and forced liquidation of all positions at a significant loss.
No Guarantee of Recovery: The assumption that the price will eventually reverse is flawed. A strong, sustained trend can wipe out the entire trading capital.
For Educational/Advanced Use Only: This script is intended for sophisticated traders who fully understand the immense risks involved. It is not a "sure profit" system.
The publisher of this script is not responsible for any financial losses incurred through its use. You are solely responsible for your trading decisions and risk management.
5. How to Use
Apply the Script: Add the script to your chart.
Configure Parameters: Adjust the input parameters according to your risk tolerance and strategy rules. Be extremely cautious with the multiplier and position size.
Monitor the Dashboard: The table will provide all necessary information about the current and historical state of the strategy.
Observe the Levels: Watch the plotted Entry, TP, and SL levels to understand the current market position.
Backtest First: Always test the strategy extensively on historical data before considering it with real capital.
6. Notes
The Maximum Multiplier safety feature is present in the code but is currently commented out. Users are strongly advised to uncomment and set this parameter to act as a final, hard liquidation point.
The script logs key events (trade start, target hit) and export data for further analysis.
This is a complex script and should be thoroughly understood before use.
BB_MES Playbook Levels + Auto Alerts (Start/TP1/TP2)Indicator Name: MES Playbook Levels + Auto Alerts (Start/TP1/TP2)
1. Indicator Overview
This is a comprehensive technical analysis tool designed for day traders, specifically for Micro E-mini S&P 500 futures (MES) but applicable to other instruments. Its primary purpose is to automate the drawing of key price levels and to provide timely alerts for a specific trading strategy, often called a "playbook" setup.
The core of the strategy involves identifying a "start" level during the regular trading session. Once the price crosses this level, the indicator automatically projects two take-profit (TP1 and TP2) targets and monitors the price action in relation to these levels.
2. Key Features
Automatic Level Plotting: The indicator plots several critical price levels on the chart, saving the trader from having to draw them manually every day.
Dynamic Start Levels: It offers two methods for establishing the bullish and bearish entry or "start" levels:
Previous Day's High/Low (PDH/PDL): The default setting uses the high and low of the prior trading day as the trigger points for long and short trades.
RTH VWAP Bands: Alternatively, it can calculate the Volume-Weighted Average Price (VWAP) that resets at the start of the Regular Trading Hours (RTH) session and create a "band" around it. The edges of this band then serve as the start levels.
Automated Take-Profit Targets: Upon a cross of a "start" level, the indicator immediately plots two take-profit lines (TP1 and TP2) based on a user-defined point value.
Trade State Management: The script intelligently manages the state of a trade. It knows when a long or short trade is active and will stop looking for new signals until the current trade is concluded (either by hitting TP2 or the end of the session).
Comprehensive Alerts: A major feature is its robust alert system. Traders can set up alerts for a wide variety of events, allowing for less screen time.
Session Highlighting: It specifically monitors the Regular Trading Hours (RTH) session and can also plot the high and low of the overnight (ON) session.
3. On-Chart Visuals
When you apply this indicator to your chart, you will see the following lines and plots:
Previous Day Levels:
PDH (Previous Day High): Plotted as a green line.
PDL (Previous Day Low): Plotted as a red line.
PDC (Previous Day Close): Plotted as a gray line.
Start Levels:
StartBull: A lime green line representing the trigger for a long trade.
StartBear: A maroon line representing the trigger for a short trade.
Take-Profit Levels:
TP1 / TP2: Teal-colored lines that appear only after a StartBull or StartBear level is crossed. TP1 is a dotted line, and TP2 is solid.
Other Levels:
RTH VWAP: A blue line showing the volume-weighted average price for the main session only.
ON High / ON Low: Orange lines showing the high and low points established outside of the RTH session.
4. How It Works: The Trading Logic
Define Session: The script first identifies the Regular Trading Hours (e.g., 9:30 AM to 4:00 PM EST).
Calculate Levels: It calculates the PDH/PDL and the RTH VWAP. Based on user input, it determines the startBullLevel (either PDH or the upper VWAP band) and the startBearLevel (either PDL or the lower VWAP band).
Wait for Signal: During the RTH session, the indicator waits for the live price (close) to cross over the startBullLevel or cross under the startBearLevel.
Initiate Trade State:
If a bullish cross occurs (longStart), it logs the entryPrice, sets the trade state to longActive, and plots the TP1 and TP2 lines above the entry price.
If a bearish cross occurs (shortStart), it does the opposite, plotting TP1 and TP2 below the entry price.
Monitor Trade: While a trade is active, it checks if the price hits TP1 or TP2.
End Trade:
When the price hits the TP2 level, the trade is considered complete. The script clears the TP lines from the chart and resets itself to look for the next start signal.
At the end of the RTH session, any active trade is automatically terminated, and all TP lines are cleared to ensure a clean slate for the next day.
5. Input Settings (Customization)
The user can customize the following parameters in the indicator's settings:
RTH Session: Define the start and end times for the main trading session.
Start from RTH VWAP band: A checkbox to switch between using PDH/PDL or the VWAP band for start levels.
VWAP band offset (pts): If using the VWAP band, this sets how many points away from the VWAP the start levels are drawn.
TP1 (pts): The number of points from the entry price to set the first take-profit target.
TP2 (pts): The number of points for the second take-profit target.
Show Overnight High/Low: A toggle to show or hide the overnight session levels.
6. Configurable Alerts
You can create alerts in TradingView for any of the following conditions generated by the script:
StartBull / StartBear: Triggers when a long or short trade is initiated.
TP1 Hit / TP2 Hit: Triggers when the price reaches the take-profit levels for both long and short trades.
Level Crosses: Separate alerts can be set for when the price crosses the PDH, PDL, PDC, RTH VWAP, ON High, or ON Low. This is useful for general market awareness.
RSI Crossover AlertRSI Crossover Alert Indicator - User Guide
The RSI Crossover Alert Indicator is a comprehensive technical analysis tool that detects multiple types of RSI crossovers and generates real-time alerts. It combines traditional RSI analysis with signal lines, divergence detection, and multi-level crossing alerts.
1. Multiple Crossover Detection
- RSI/Signal Line Cross: Signals a primary trend change.
- RSI/Second Signal Cross: Confirmation signals for stronger trends.
- Level Crossings: Crosses of Overbought 70, Oversold 30, and Midline 50.
- Divergence Detection: Hidden and regular divergences for reversal signals.
2. Alert Types
- Alert: RSI > Signal
Description: Bullish momentum is building.
Signal: Consider long positions.
- Alert: RSI < Signal
Description: Bearish momentum is building.
Signal: Consider short positions.
- Alert: RSI > 70
Description: Entering the overbought zone.
Signal: Prepare for a potential reversal.
- Alert: RSI < 30
Description: Entering the oversold zone.
Signal: Watch for a bounce opportunity.
- Alert: RSI crosses 50
Description: A shift in momentum.
Signal: Trend confirmation.
3. Visual Components
- Lines: RSI blue, Signal orange, Second Signal purple
- Histogram: Visualizes momentum by showing the difference between RSI and the Signal line.
- Background Zones: Red overbought, Green oversold
- Markers: Up/down triangles to indicate crossovers.
- Info Table: Real-time RSI values and status.
Strategy 1: Classic Crossover
- Entry Long: RSI crosses above the Signal Line AND RSI is below 50.
- Entry Short: RSI crosses below the Signal Line AND RSI is above 50.
- Take Profit: On the opposite signal.
- Stop Loss: At the recent swing high/low.
Strategy 2: Extreme Zone Reversal
- Entry Long: RSI is below 30 and crosses above the Signal Line.
- Entry Short: RSI is above 70 and crosses below the Signal Line.
- Risk Management: Higher win rate but fewer signals. Use a minimum 2:1 risk-reward ratio.
Strategy 3: Divergence Trading
- Setup: Enable divergence alerts and look for price/RSI divergence. Wait for an RSI crossover for confirmation.
- Entry: Enter on the crossover after the divergence appears. Place the stop loss beyond the starting point of the divergence.
Strategy 4: Multi-Timeframe Confirmation
1. Check the higher timeframe e.g. Daily to identify the main trend.
2. Use the current timeframe e.g. 4H/1H for your entry.
3. Only enter in the direction of the main trend.
4. Use the RSI crossover as the entry trigger.
Optimal Settings by Market
- Forex Major Pairs
RSI Length: 14, Signal Length: 9, Overbought/Oversold: 70/30
- Crypto High Volatility
RSI Length: 10-12, Signal Length: 6-8, Overbought/Oversold: 75/25
- Stocks Trending
RSI Length: 14-21, Signal Length: 9-12, Overbought/Oversold: 70/30
- Commodities
RSI Length: 14, Signal Length: 9, Overbought/Oversold: 80/20
Risk Management Rules
1. Position Sizing: Never risk more than 1-2% on a single trade. Reduce size in ranging markets.
2. Stop Loss Placement: Place stops beyond the recent swing high/low for crossovers. Using an ATR-based stop is also effective.
3. Profit Taking: Take partial profits at a 1:1 risk-reward ratio. Switch to a trailing stop after reaching 2:1.
1. Filtering Signals
- Combine with volume indicators.
- Confirm the trend on a higher timeframe.
- Wait for candlestick pattern confirmation.
2. Avoid Common Mistakes
- Don't trade every single crossover.
- Avoid taking signals against a strong trend.
- Do not ignore risk management.
3. Market Conditions
- Trending Market: Focus on midline 50 crosses.
- Ranging Market: Look for reversals from overbought/oversold levels.
- Volatile Market: Widen the overbought/oversold levels.
- If you get too many false signals:
Increase the signal line period, add other confirmation indicators, or use a higher timeframe.
- If you are missing major moves:
Decrease the RSI length, shorten the signal line period, or check your alert settings.
Recommended Combinations
1. RSI + MACD: For dual momentum confirmation.
2. RSI + Bollinger Bands: For volatility-adjusted signals.
3. RSI + Volume: To confirm the strength of a signal.
4. RSI + Moving Averages: To use as a trend filter.
This indicator provides a comprehensive RSI analysis. Success depends on proper configuration, risk management, and combining signals with the overall market context. Start with the default settings, then optimize based on your trading style and market conditions.
RVOL-TradingCore Functionality
1. Dual RVOL Approach for Entry Confirmation
The script calculates two kinds of RVOLs for up to four intraday timeframes:
RVOL1 (based on daily average volume):
Formula: current intraday volume / 21-day SMA of daily volume
RVOL2 (based on same-timeframe average):
Formula: current intraday volume / average of past N intraday volumes (default 14)
The logic:
High RVOL1 → indicates unusual volume relative to daily historical averages.
High RVOL2 → indicates volume spike compared to typical activity at that timeframe.
2. Entry Signal – CheckGreen Condition
A bullish "Green" condition is triggered if:
Gap-up open (Opening_Price > 0)
Day’s low remains above previous close (strict lowCheck condition)
RVOL1 exceeds set thresholds (default 5% for 3m, 7% for 5m)
RVOL2 exceeds set thresholds (default 100%)
This is a strict entry filter, ensuring both price action and volume align.
💰 Position Sizing Logic
When enabled, the script calculates position size using three stop-loss methods:
Fixed SL % (e.g., 3%)
Day’s Low (LOD) below entry candle
Previous Day’s Low (PDL) below entry candle
🔢 Formula:
plaintext
Copy
Edit
Position Size = totalRisk / (entryPrice × stopLoss%)
Then it estimates position value as % of ₹1L capital (hardcoded).
Outputs include:
Number of shares
% distance to SL
Position size in lakhs (L)
📋 RVOL Table Display
Displays in a table on the chart with the following columns:
Timeframe RVOL1 (%) RVOL2 (%) % Price Change Price SL % Position LOD-based Position PDL-based Position
Color coding helps identify which values meet thresholds.
📌 Customizable Inputs
✅ RVOL Inputs:
Days for SMA & historical volume (default: 21 & 14)
Timeframes: 3m, 5m, 15m, 60m (all configurable)
Thresholds for RVOL1, RVOL2, Gap %, and % price change
✅ Position Size Inputs:
Risk capital (default: ₹2500)
Enable/disable each SL type (SL %, LOD, PDL)
✅ Table Display:
Table size, color, location on chart
Enable/disable SL columns
🧩 Visual Elements
Draws horizontal levels for 5m/15m candle highs (if enabled)
Marks gap-up with a purple 'G' label
Color highlights on table cells for high RVOL or negative price moves
Xen's Flag Pattern Scalper1. Input Parameters:
FlagLength: Determines the length of the flag pattern.
TakeProfit1Ratio, takeProfit2Ratio, takeProfit3Ratio: Define the ratios for calculating
the take-profit levels relative to the entry price.
RiskRewardRatio: Specifies the risk-reward ratio for calculating the stop-loss level
relative to the entry price.
2 Flag Conditions:
BullishFlag: Checks if the current bar meets the conditions for a bullish flag pattern. It
evaluates to true if the low of the current bar is lower than the low flagLength bars
ago, and the close of the current bar is higher than the high flagLength bars ago.
BearishFlag: Checks if the current bar meets the conditions for a bearish flag pattern. It evaluates to true if the high of the current bar is higher than the high flagLength bars
ago, and the close of the current bar is lower than the low flagLength bars ago.
3. Entry Price:
EntryPrice: Calculates the entry price based on whether a bullish or bearish flag
pattern is identified. For a bullish flag, the entry price is set to the low of the current bar.
For a bearish flag, the entry price is set to the high of the current bar.
4. Stop Loss:
StopLoss: Determines the stop-loss level based on the entry price and the specified
riskRewardRatio . For a bullish flag, the stop-loss level is calculated by subtracting the
difference between the high and low of the current bar multiplied by the riskRewardRatio from the low of the current bar. For a bearish flag, the stop-loss level
is calculated similarly but added to the high of the current bar.
5. Take Profit Levels:
Three take-profit levels ( takeProfit1, takeProfit2, takeProfit3 ) are calculated based on
the entry price, stop-loss level, and specified take-profit ratios ( takeProfit1Ratio,
takeProfit2Ratio, takeProfit3Ratio ).
6. Plotting Signals and Levels:
Bullish and bearish flag patterns are plotted using triangle shapes ( shape.triangleup for
bullish and shape.triangledown for bearish) above or below the bars, respectively.
Entry, stop-loss, and take-profit levels are plotted using horizontal lines ( line.new )
with different colors and styles. Entry and stop-loss levels are labeled with "Entry" and "SL",
respectively, while take-profit levels are labeled with "TP 1", "TP 2", and "TP 3".
The colors for bullish flags are white for entry, red for stop-loss, and green for take-profit levels. For bearish flags, the colors are the same, but the labels are plotted above the bars.
7. Label Placement:
Labels for entry, stop-loss, and take-profit levels are placed a distance of 4 bars to the right
of the entry price using bar_index + 4 .
This indicator is intended to help traders identify flag patterns on price charts and visualize potential entry, stop-loss, and take-profit levels associated with these patterns.
Please use risk management and when TP1 is hit, move stoploss to breakeven .
Heiken Ashi Algo v6The Heiken Ashi Algo Oscillator v6, introduces a refined approach to technical analysis applicable across various markets. Central to this algorithm is the integration of the Relative Strength Index #RSI, a staple indicator renowned for its effectiveness in measuring momentum.
The RSI - Tried and True:
By incorporating the #RSI, traders gain valuable insights into the speed and strength of price movements, aiding in the identification of potential #trend #reversals and #continuations.
Why Heiken Ashi Candles:
Additionally, the utilization of #Heiken Ashi candles within this algorithm offers a smoother representation of price action, reducing noise and enhancing clarity in trend analysis. This feature is particularly advantageous in volatile markets, where traditional candlestick patterns may produce false signals. By employing Heiken #Ashi candles, traders can more accurately identify underlying trends and make informed decisions based on reliable price data.
Combining RSI and Heiken Ashi:
The synergy between the RSI and Heiken Ashi candles in the Heiken Ashi Algo Oscillator v6 provides traders with a comprehensive perspective on both momentum and trend direction. This combination allows for a nuanced analysis of market dynamics, enabling traders to navigate various market conditions with greater confidence.
Heiken Ashi Candle Sizes:
The size of the Heiken Ashi candles serves as a visual indicator of the distance the RSI has moved between closing prices, offering additional insights into momentum shifts.
Not your average Heiken Ashi Candles:
Ive taken the time to do some serious custom coding for these particular Heiken Ashi Candles.
They do NOT color as the normal ones do. There is a setting in the inputs tab of the indicator that allows you to color them according to my secret code where its looking for Breaks of Structure on lower timeframes based on Heiken Ashi Candle calculations.
Turning on this feature gives you a more promising array of candle colors telling you about false or positive breakouts and trends.
Why choose this tool:
CoffeeShopCrypto's Heiken Ashi Algo Oscillator v6 offers a balanced and effective tool for traders across different markets. By leveraging the power of the RSI and Heiken Ashi candles, traders can enhance their decision-making process, identify trading opportunities with greater precision, and ultimately improve their overall trading performance.
------------------------------------------HOW TO USE IT------------------------------------------
Inflow / Outflow (accumulation and distribution) Ribbon
In trading we know liquidity means volume and volume is orders. This ribbon shows you when orders are entering, exiting, filling or flat in the market.
The Liquidity Ribbon is a visual representation of whats happening with accumulation and distribution in the market.
It acts as a dynamic area of support and resistance for the RSI (momentum).
Once the RSI breaks above or below the full area of the ribbon, you have an overturned short term market.
Breaking this area isn't easy because of the one sided thick line known as the PoC line or Point of Control Line.
This line changes between a rising and falling color to tell you what side of the market has the most resistance or support.
Custom HA candles
The common way for HA candles to be colors is green for bullish and red for bearish.
These candles color differently according to market dynamics vs how the current candle closes.
This is helpful to keep you from taking longs or shorts when the momentum just doesn't have the move.
How it all works together: Taking entries and failed breakouts.
In the image below (left to right) you can see the following take place:
Short Entry:
HA Candles push down through the ribbon breaking below its low side (Support Ribbon Broken)
Following this the RSI RANGE is broken to the down side.
This is a good setup for a short breakout
Retrace to false breakout:
After this price retraces and so does momentum.
HA Candles attempt to but fail to break through the top of the ribbon and push back down . This is a false breakout.
Bullish Divergence to Long Entry:
The Heiken Ashi Algo forms a bullish divergence and HA candles push back up into the ribbon. Without a change in candle structure the RSI breaks the top of the ribbon where the control line sits as well as breaking through the top of the RANGE area and
This is a promising setup for a long trade.
Rally Base Rally: (into secondary long trade)
As price is rising, it retraces until HA candles are within the RANGE. No candle closes or has a low below the RSI midline.
HA Candles are forming a consolidation. After consolidation the RSI breaks out the top of the ribbon and the top of the RANGE allowing a secondary long entry.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Im not gonna lie. Ive written a lot of tutorials but this one was probably the most exciting to describe.
If you have any questions please do ask below.
Trade Information BoxThis script is a TradingView indicator written in Pine Script. It creates an information box on the chart that provides details related to a trade, including entry plan, stop loss, take profit, and position sizing. Let's break down the components:
1. **Input Parameters:**
- `entryPrice`: The entry price for the trade. This is a manually input value, and the default is set to 100.
- `smaLength`: The length parameter for the Simple Moving Average (SMA) calculation. Default is set to 20.
- `smaMultiplier`: The multiplier used to calculate the stop loss and take profit based on the SMA. Default is set to 1.5.
- `riskPerTradePercent`: The percentage of risk per trade as a decimal. Default is set to 2.
- `capital`: The total capital available for trading. Default is set to 10,000.
2. **Calculations:**
- `smaValue`: Calculates the Simple Moving Average based on the closing prices with the specified length (`smaLength`).
- `stopLoss`: Calculates the stop loss level by subtracting the product of the SMA value and the multiplier (`smaMultiplier`) from the entry price.
- `takeProfit`: Calculates the take profit level by adding the product of the SMA value and the multiplier (`smaMultiplier`) to the entry price.
- `riskPerTrade`: Calculates the actual risk amount per trade based on the specified percentage of capital.
- `maxQuantity`: Calculates the maximum quantity of shares or contracts that can be bought based on the specified risk percentage and the difference between entry price and stop loss.
- `buyValue`: Calculates the total value of the position based on the maximum quantity and entry price.
3. **Info Box:**
- `labelBox`: Defines a label box on the chart.
- `label.set_xy(labelBox, bar_index, high)`: Sets the position of the label box to the high of the current bar.
- `label.set_text(...)`: Defines the text content of the label box, providing details on the trading plan, entry, stop loss, take profit, capital, risk per trade, maximum quantity, and buy value.
Overall, this indicator is designed to provide traders with key information related to their trade plan, risk management, and position sizing directly on the chart. The displayed values are formatted with three decimal places for clarity.
GKD-C STD-Filtered, Adaptive Exponential HMA [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C STD-Filtered, Adaptive Exponential HMA is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ GKD-C STD-Filtered, Adaptive Exponential HMA
What is the STD-Filtered, Adaptive Exponential HMA?
The Adaptive Hull Moving Average (AHMA) is a powerful technical indicator that combines the advantages of both the Hull Moving Average (HMA) and adaptive filtering techniques. It is primarily used by traders and investors to identify trends in financial markets and generate buy/sell signals. This essay aims to provide a comprehensive understanding of the AHMA, its components, and its applications in trading and investing.
Components of Adaptive Hull Moving Average
Exponential Moving Average (EMA)
The EMA is a widely-used technical indicator that assigns more weight to recent data points, making it more responsive to new information. The EMA is calculated using a smoothing factor (alpha), which determines the degree of responsiveness.
Adaptive Alpha
The adaptive alpha is a crucial component of the AHMA, as it determines the optimal alpha value for the EMA calculations based on the market's signal-to-noise ratio (SNR). This adaptive approach ensures that the indicator responds appropriately to different market conditions, providing more accurate buy/sell signals.
Hull Moving Average (HMA)
The HMA is a popular technical indicator that combines the advantages of weighted moving averages and simple moving averages. The HMA is designed to be more responsive to price changes while reducing lag, making it a valuable tool for trend analysis.
Standard Deviation Filter
The standard deviation filter is an optional component of the AHMA that helps reduce noise in the input data series. By applying this filter, traders can further improve the accuracy of the AHMA, minimizing false signals.
How this is done
Important functions:
aEMA(float src, float alpha) =>
float ema = src
ema := na(ema ) ? src : nz(ema ) + alpha * (src - nz(ema ))
ema
adaptiveAlpha(float SNR, float periodL, float periodH)=>
float al = 2.0 / (periodL + 1.0)
float ah = 2.0 / (periodH + 1.0)
float out = (ah + SNR * (al - ah))
out
hullAdaptiveMovingAverage(float src, int persnr, int perfast, int perslow, int gain, float beta)=>
float signal = math.abs(src - nz(src ))
float noise = 0
for i = 0 to persnr - 1
noise += math.abs(nz(src ) - nz(src ))
float SNR = beta * signal / noise * math.sqrt(persnr)
float exp2SNR = math.exp(2.0 * SNR)
float tanhSNR = (exp2SNR - 1.0) / (exp2SNR + 1.0)
float w = math.pow(tanhSNR, gain)
float a1 = adaptiveAlpha(w, perfast * 0.5, perslow * 0.5)
float a2 = adaptiveAlpha(w, perfast, perslow)
float a3 = adaptiveAlpha(w, math.sqrt(perfast), math.sqrt(perslow))
float h1 = src
float h2 = src
float h3 = src
h1 := aEMA(h1, a1)
h2 := aEMA(h2, a2)
h3 := (2 * h1 - h2)
h3 := aEMA(h3, a3)
h3
stdFilter(float src, int len, float filter)=>
float price = src
float filtdev = filter * ta.stdev(src, len)
price := math.abs(price - nz(price )) < filtdev ? nz(price ) : price
price
1. aEMA(): This function calculates the exponential moving average (EMA) of a given data series (src) using the specified alpha value. It initializes the EMA with the data series and then calculates it recursively using the previous EMA and alpha value.
2. adaptiveAlpha(): This function calculates the adaptive alpha value based on the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), the fast period (periodL), and the slow period (periodH). It computes the adaptive alpha by linearly interpolating between the fast and slow alpha values based on the SNR.
3. hullAdaptiveMovingAverage(): This function implements the AHMA by taking the input data series (src), the signal-to-noise ratio period (persnr), fast and slow periods (perfast, perslow), gain, and a beta value. It calculates the SNR by dividing the absolute difference between the current data point and its previous value (signal) by the sum of the absolute differences between consecutive data points (noise) over the specified SNR period. The function then computes the adaptive alpha values (a1, a2, a3) and calculates the Hull Moving Average (HMA) using three EMAs (h1, h2, h3).
4. stdFilter(): This function applies a standard deviation filter to the input data series (src) using the specified filter period (len) and filter coefficient (filter). It filters out the data points whose absolute difference from the previous data point is less than the specified multiple of the standard deviation.
The code computes the AHMA of the input data series (src) by applying the hullAdaptiveMovingAverage() function, and if the filter option is set to "Both" or "AEHMA" and the filter coefficient is greater than 0, the standard deviation filter is applied to the AHMA using the stdFilter() function. Finally, the output is stored in the variable "out," and the previous value of the output is stored in the variable "sig."
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: STD-Filtered, Adaptive Exponential HMA as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
1-Candle Rule Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close)
2. GKD-B Volatility/Volume agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
4. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
]█ Setting up the GKD
The GKD system involves chaining indicators together. These are the steps to set this up.
Use a GKD-C indicator alone on a chart
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Use a GKD-V indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Use a GKD-B indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Baseline (Baseline, Backtest)
1. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline"
Volatility/Volume (Volatility/Volume, Backte st)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Solo"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Signal Type" setting to "Crossing" (neither traditional nor both can be backtested)
3. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Volatility/Volume"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, a) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Trading" if using a directional GKD-V indicator; or, b) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full" if using a directional or non-directional GKD-V indicator (non-directional GKD-V can only test Longs and Shorts separately)
6. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Side" to "Long" or "Short
7. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
Solo Confirmation Simple (Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
1. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Solo Confirmation Complex without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
6. Import the GKD-C into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Solo Confirmation Complex with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
7. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Full GKD without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
9. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Full GKD with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Import the GKD-C Continuation indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
9. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
10. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Baseline + Volatility/Volume (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, make sure the "Signal Type" setting is set to "Traditional"
3. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
5. Import the GKD-V into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full". For this backtest, you must test Longs and Shorts separately
7. To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you can test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-B Baseline
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Stacked 1: None
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 1
Outputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation 2 indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-BT Backtest or GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Stacked 1: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+ or GKD-BT Backtest
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C STD-Filtered, Kaiser Window FIR Digital Filter [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C STD-Filtered, Kaiser Window FIR Digital Filter is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ GKD-C STD-Filtered, Kaiser Window FIR Digital Filter
What is a Kaiser Window FIR Digital Filter?
A Kaiser Window is a type of window function used in digital signal processing to design Finite Impulse Response (FIR) filters. FIR filters are digital filters that have a finite duration impulse response.
The Kaiser Window is a window function that is used to shape the impulse response of an FIR filter. The window function is applied to the coefficients of the ideal low-pass filter, which results in a truncated and windowed version of the ideal filter.
The Kaiser Window is designed using the Kaiser-Bessel window method, which is a technique for designing FIR filters with a specified stopband attenuation and transition width. The method uses the Kaiser Window to control the magnitude of the filter coefficients in the transition band and stopband.
The Kaiser Window is characterized by a parameter called the "beta" parameter, which controls the trade-off between the transition width and the stopband attenuation of the filter. The larger the beta value, the narrower the transition width and the higher the stopband attenuation.
Kaiser Window FIR filters have a number of advantages, including good stopband attenuation, narrow transition width, and the ability to control the ripple in the passband. However, they also have some disadvantages, including a high computational complexity and a non-linear phase response.
What is the STD-Filtered, Kaiser Window FIR Digital Filter?
This indicator is an implementation of a Kaiser window finite impulse response (FIR) digital filter. The Kaiser window is a widely used window function for designing FIR filters due to its ability to control the trade-off between the main lobe width and sidelobe levels. The design process begins with the calculation of the zero-order modified Bessel function of the first kind using an iterative method. This function plays a crucial role in the calculation of the Kaiser window coefficients.
The filter characteristics, such as passband, stopband, passband ripple, and stopband attenuation, are user-defined inputs. Based on these inputs, and filtering order function estimates the filter length, alpha value (a parameter governing the shape of the Kaiser window), and adjusted passband and stopband values. The filter length is adjusted to be an odd integer to maintain filter symmetry, which is essential for linear phase response.
Subsequently, a normalization function calculates the filter coefficients and the Kaiser window coefficients. The Kaiser window coefficients are obtained by applying the zero-order modified Bessel function to the window samples. The filter coefficients are derived by multiplying the sinc function with the Kaiser window coefficients, and then normalized to preserve the filter's gain in the passband.
The filter response function computes the output of the FIR filter by convolving the input signal with the filter coefficients. Optionally, the output signal can be passed through a standard deviation filter, as determined by the user-selected filter options.
The Kaiser window FIR digital filter presented in this study is suitable for various applications, including noise reduction, signal smoothing, and extraction of relevant information from complex data sets. The implementation allows users to adapt the filter performance according to their specific requirements by adjusting the passband ripple, stopband attenuation, passband bars, and stopband bars, which determine the filter's frequency response and transition band characteristics.
The filter design process relies on the Kaiser window's flexibility, as it can be shaped according to the alpha parameter calculated in the filterOrder() function. This parameter controls the trade-off between the filter's main lobe width and sidelobe levels. A larger alpha value results in higher sidelobe suppression at the cost of a wider main lobe, whereas a smaller alpha value leads to a narrower main lobe but less sidelobe suppression. This trade-off allows users to fine-tune the filter's performance for specific applications.
In addition to the filter's frequency domain characteristics, the implementation ensures a linear phase response by maintaining filter symmetry. Linear phase filters are crucial for applications where the preservation of the signal's phase information is essential, such as audio processing and communication systems.
The optional standard deviation filter serves as a supplementary tool for enhancing the output signal. By applying this filter, users can further suppress unwanted high-frequency components and improve the overall signal quality. This feature is particularly useful in applications where the noise characteristics are unknown or vary over time.
In summary, the Kaiser window FIR digital filter offers a highly customizable and efficient solution for signal processing tasks. The combination of user-defined filter characteristics, a flexible Kaiser window function, linear phase response, and optional standard deviation filtering makes this implementation a powerful and versatile tool for a wide range of applications in various domains, including audio processing, communication systems, and data analysis.
How this is done
Kaiser Window FIR Digital Filter calculations:
/Bessel function, z-order hyperbolic
zorderHyperbolicBessel(float x)=>
float besselAccuracy = 0.000001
float bessel = 1.0
float summ = 0
float temp = 0
float k = 2.0
float factorial = 1.0
temp := x / 2
summ := temp * temp
bessel += summ
while summ > besselAccuracy
factorial := factorial * k
temp *= x / 2
summ := temp / factorial
summ := summ * summ
bessel += summ
k += 1.0
bessel
//Filter length estimations
filterOrder(float PassBandRipple, float StopBandAttenuation, float PassBandBars, float StopBandBars)=>
float sbripple = 0
float pbripple = 0
float ripple = 0
float attenuation = 0
float bandwidth = 0
float d = 0
float n = 0
float x = 0
float alpha = 0
float FilterLength = 0.
PassBand = 1 / PassBandBars
StopBand = 1 / StopBandBars
bandwidth := PassBand + StopBand
if bandwidth >= 0.5
PassBand := 0.5 * PassBand / bandwidth
StopBand := 0.5 * StopBand / bandwidth
sbripple := math.pow(10.0, (-0.05 * StopBandAttenuation))
pbripple := math.pow(10.0, (0.05 * PassBandRipple)) - 1.0
ripple := math.min(sbripple, pbripple)
attenuation := -20 * math.log(ripple) / math.log(10)
if math.round(attenuation, 5) <= 21.0
alpha := 0.0
d := 0.9222
if math.round(attenuation, 5) > 50.0
alpha := 0.1102 * (attenuation - 8.7)
d := (attenuation - 7.95) / 14.36
if math.round(attenuation, 5) > 21.0 and math.round(attenuation, 5) <= 50
alpha := (0.5842 * math.pow((attenuation - 21.0), 0.4)) + (0.07886 * (attenuation - 21.0))
d := (attenuation - 7.95) / 14.36
n := (d / StopBand) + 1.0
x := math.round(n)
if x % 2 < 1
FilterLength := x
else
FilterLength := x - 1
Normalization(float PassBandRipple, float StopBandAttenuation, float PassBandBars, float StopBandBars)=>
float filter = 0
float Ioalfa = 0
float temp = 0
float norm = 0
= filterOrder(PassBandRipple, StopBandAttenuation, PassBandBars, StopBandBars)
int M = int(FilterLength / 2)
float filterCoeff = array.new(FilterLength + 1, 0)
float kaiserWindow = array.new(M + 1, 0)
//Window function
norm := M
Ioalfa := zorderHyperbolicBessel(alpha)
for i = 1 to M
temp := i / norm
array.set(kaiserWindow, i, zorderHyperbolicBessel(alpha * math.sqrt(1 - (temp * temp))) / Ioalfa)
//filter coefficients
array.set(filterCoeff, 0, 2.0 * (PassBand + (0.5 * StopBand)))
norm := array.get(filterCoeff, 0)
temp := math.pi * array.get(filterCoeff, 0)
for i = 1 to M
array.set(filterCoeff, i, math.sin(i * temp) * array.get(kaiserWindow, i) / (i * math.pi))
norm := norm + (2 * array.get(filterCoeff, i))
//casual conversion and normalization
float NormCoef = array.new(FilterLength + 1, 0)
for i = M + 1 to FilterLength
array.set(filterCoeff, i, array.get(filterCoeff, i - M))
for i = 0 to M - 1
array.set(filterCoeff, i, array.get(filterCoeff, FilterLength - i))
array.set(filterCoeff, M, 2.0 * (PassBand + (0.5 * StopBand)))
for i = 0 to FilterLength
array.set(NormCoef, i, array.get(filterCoeff, i) / norm)
filterResponse(float src, float NormCoef, int per)=>
float valueBuf = 0
float temp = 0
float temp1 = 0
float Response = 0.0
int i = 0
int filterlength = 0
while filterlength <= per
valueBuf := nz(src )
Response := Response + valueBuf * array.get(NormCoef, filterlength)
filterlength += 1
Response
Here's a detailed explanation of the functions involed in the code posted above:
1. zorderHyperbolicBessel(float x): This function calculates the zero-order modified Bessel function of the first kind (I0) for a given input x. The Bessel function is used in the calculation of the Kaiser window coefficients.
-besselAccuracy: The desired accuracy for the Bessel function calculation (0.000001).
-bessel: The initial value of the Bessel function (1.0).
-summ: The sum of terms in the series representation of the Bessel function.
-temp: A temporary variable to store intermediate values.
-k: The index for the series representation of the Bessel function.
-factorial: The factorial of k, used to calculate the denominator of the series terms.
The function iteratively calculates the terms in the series representation of the Bessel function until the sum of the squared terms is less than the desired accuracy. The final value of the Bessel function is returned.
2. filterOrder(PassBandRipple, StopBandAttenuation, PassBandBars, StopBandBars): This function estimates the filter length, alpha value, passband, and stopband for the Kaiser window-based FIR filter based on the given filter characteristics.
-PassBandRipple: The maximum allowed passband ripple in decibels.
-StopBandAttenuation: The minimum required stopband attenuation in decibels.
-PassBandBars: The number of bars in the passband.
-StopBandBars: The number of bars in the stopband.
The function first calculates the normalized passband and stopband frequencies. If their sum is greater than or equal to 0.5, they are scaled down to ensure the bandwidth is less than the Nyquist frequency.
-sbripple: The stopband ripple, calculated as 10^(-0.05 * StopBandAttenuation).
-pbripple: The passband ripple, calculated as 10^(0.05 * PassBandRipple) - 1.
-ripple: The minimum of the passband and stopband ripple values.
-attenuation: The attenuation in decibels, calculated as -20 * log10(ripple).
The alpha value and the variable d are determined based on the attenuation value:
-If attenuation <= 21 dB, alpha = 0 and d = 0.9222.
-If attenuation > 50 dB, alpha = 0.1102 * (attenuation - 8.7) and d = (attenuation - 7.95) / 14.36.
-If 21 dB < attenuation <= 50 dB, alpha = (0.5842 * (attenuation - 21)^0.4) + (0.07886 * (attenuation - 21)) and d = (attenuation - 7.95) / 14.36.
Finally, the filter length n is calculated as (d / StopBand) + 1. If n is odd, the filter length is set to n; otherwise, it is set to n - 1. The function returns an array containing the filter length, alpha value, passband, and stopband.
The functions Normalization() and filterResponse() play critical roles in the implementation of the Kaiser window FIR digital filter. They focus on calculating normalized filter coefficients and applying the filter to an input signal, respectively.
Normalization() function:
1. The function accepts four input parameters: PassBandRipple, StopBandAttenuation, PassBandBars, and StopBandBars. These parameters define the filter's desired performance characteristics.
2. It then calls the filterOrder() function to obtain the filter length, alpha parameter, passband, and stopband.
3. Next, the function calculates the Kaiser window coefficients using the obtained alpha parameter and the zero-order hyperbolic Bessel function. This is done by iterating from 1 to M (half of the filter length) and calculating the window coefficients using the formula:
zorderHyperbolicBessel(alpha * math.sqrt(1 - (temp * temp))) / Ioalfa
4. The filter coefficients are computed by multiplying the Kaiser window coefficients with the sinc function values. The filter coefficients are then stored in an array called filterCoeff.
5. The function performs causal conversion and normalization of the filter coefficients. The coefficients are normalized by dividing each element by the norm value calculated earlier.
6. Finally, the function returns the normalized filter coefficients NormCoef and the filter length FilterLength.
filterResponse() function:
1. This function is responsible for applying the calculated filter to the input signal src. It accepts three input parameters: the source signal src, the normalized filter coefficients NormCoef, and the period per over which the filter should be applied.
2. It initializes variables valueBuf, Response, and filterlength to store intermediate values and the final filtered signal output.
3. The function then iterates over the input signal for a given period. For each sample in the period, the function multiplies the input signal's value by the corresponding filter coefficient and accumulates the result in the Response variable.
4. Once the iteration is complete, the function returns the filtered signal output Response.
To wrap up, the zorderHyperbolicBessel() function calculates the zero-order modified Bessel function of the first kind, which is used in the Kaiser window calculation. The filterOrder() function estimates the filter length, alpha value, passband, and stopband for the Kaiser window-based FIR filter based on the given filter characteristics. These functions are part of the implementation of a Kaiser window FIR digital filter. The Kaiser window is a type of window function used to design finite impulse response (FIR) filters. The filter length, alpha value, passband, and stopband determined by the filterOrder() function are utilized in the subsequent steps of the filter design process.
Following the filterOrder() function, the Normalization() function calculates the filter coefficients and the Kaiser window coefficients. These coefficients are used in the filterResponse() function to compute the output of the FIR filter.
In the main body of the code, user-defined input values for PassBandBars, StopBandBars, StopBandAttenuation, and PassBandRipple are taken. These inputs are used to estimate the filter order, passband, and stopband using the filterOrder() function. Then, the Kaiser window coefficients and filter coefficients are computed using the Normalization() function.
Finally, the output of the FIR filter is computed using the filterResponse() function, which calculates the filtered response based on the input signal and the filter coefficients. The output signal is then passed through a standard deviation filter (stdFilter()) if the user has selected the "Both" or "Kaiser Window FIR Digital Filter" filter options, and the final output signal is stored in the out variable.
In summary, the code provided is an implementation of a Kaiser window FIR digital filter that processes an input signal based on user-defined filter characteristics (passband, stopband, passband ripple, and stopband attenuation). The zorderHyperbolicBessel() and filterOrder() functions are critical components in the filter design process, calculating the zero-order modified Bessel function and estimating the filter length, alpha value, passband, and stopband, respectively.
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: STD-Filtered, Kaiser Window FIR Digital Filter as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
1-Candle Rule Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close)
2. GKD-B Volatility/Volume agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
4. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
]█ Setting up the GKD
The GKD system involves chaining indicators together. These are the steps to set this up.
Use a GKD-C indicator alone on a chart
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Use a GKD-V indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Use a GKD-B indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Baseline (Baseline, Backtest)
1. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline"
Volatility/Volume (Volatility/Volume, Backte st)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Solo"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Signal Type" setting to "Crossing" (neither traditional nor both can be backtested)
3. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Volatility/Volume"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, a) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Trading" if using a directional GKD-V indicator; or, b) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full" if using a directional or non-directional GKD-V indicator (non-directional GKD-V can only test Longs and Shorts separately)
6. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Side" to "Long" or "Short
7. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
Solo Confirmation Simple (Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
1. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Solo Confirmation Complex without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
6. Import the GKD-C into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Solo Confirmation Complex with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
7. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Full GKD without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
9. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Full GKD with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Import the GKD-C Continuation indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
9. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
10. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Baseline + Volatility/Volume (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, make sure the "Signal Type" setting is set to "Traditional"
3. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
5. Import the GKD-V into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full". For this backtest, you must test Longs and Shorts separately
7. To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you can test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-B Baseline
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Stacked 1: None
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 1
Outputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation 2 indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-BT Backtest or GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Stacked 1: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+ or GKD-BT Backtest
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Stochastic of RSX [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Stochastic of RSX is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: Stochastic of RSX as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
1-Candle Rule Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close)
2. GKD-B Volatility/Volume agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
4. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
]█ Setting up the GKD
The GKD system involves chaining indicators together. These are the steps to set this up.
Use a GKD-C indicator alone on a chart
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Use a GKD-V indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Use a GKD-B indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Baseline (Baseline, Backtest)
1. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline"
Volatility/Volume (Volatility/Volume, Backte st)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Solo"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Signal Type" setting to "Crossing" (neither traditional nor both can be backtested)
3. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Volatility/Volume"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, a) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Trading" if using a directional GKD-V indicator; or, b) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full" if using a directional or non-directional GKD-V indicator (non-directional GKD-V can only test Longs and Shorts separately)
6. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Side" to "Long" or "Short
7. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
Solo Confirmation Simple (Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
1. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Solo Confirmation Complex without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
6. Import the GKD-C into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Solo Confirmation Complex with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
7. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Full GKD without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
9. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Full GKD with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Import the GKD-C Continuation indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
9. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
10. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Baseline + Volatility/Volume (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, make sure the "Signal Type" setting is set to "Traditional"
3. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
5. Import the GKD-V into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full". For this backtest, you must test Longs and Shorts separately
7. To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you can test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
█ GKD-C Stochastic of RSX
What is the RSX?
The Jurik RSX is a technical indicator developed by Mark Jurik to measure the momentum and strength of price movements in financial markets, such as stocks, commodities, and currencies. It is an advanced version of the traditional Relative Strength Index (RSI), designed to offer smoother and less lagging signals compared to the standard RSI.
The main advantage of the Jurik RSX is that it provides more accurate and timely signals for traders and analysts, thanks to its improved calculation methods that reduce noise and lag in the indicator's output. This enables better decision-making when analyzing market trends and potential trading opportunities.
What is Stochastic RSI?
Stochastic RSI (StochRSI) is a technical analysis indicator that combines the concepts of the Stochastic Oscillator and the Relative Strength Index (RSI). It is used to identify potential overbought and oversold conditions in financial markets, as well as to generate buy and sell signals based on the momentum of price movements.
To understand Stochastic RSI, let's first define the two individual indicators it is based on:
Stochastic Oscillator: A momentum indicator that compares a particular closing price of a security to a range of its prices over a certain period. It is used to identify potential trend reversals and generate buy and sell signals.
Relative Strength Index (RSI): A momentum oscillator that measures the speed and change of price movements. It ranges between 0 and 100 and is used to identify overbought or oversold conditions in the market.
Now, let's dive into the Stochastic RSI:
The Stochastic RSI applies the Stochastic Oscillator formula to the RSI values, essentially creating an indicator of an indicator. It helps to identify when the RSI is in overbought or oversold territory with more sensitivity, providing more frequent signals than the standalone RSI.
The formula for StochRSI is as follows:
StochRSI = (RSI - Lowest Low RSI) / (Highest High RSI - Lowest Low RSI)
Where:
RSI is the current RSI value.
Lowest Low RSI is the lowest RSI value over a specified period (e.g., 14 days).
Highest High RSI is the highest RSI value over the same specified period.
StochRSI ranges from 0 to 1, but it is usually multiplied by 100 for easier interpretation, making the range 0 to 100. Like the RSI, values close to 0 indicate oversold conditions, while values close to 100 indicate overbought conditions. However, since the StochRSI is more sensitive, traders typically use 20 as the oversold threshold and 80 as the overbought threshold.
Traders use the StochRSI to generate buy and sell signals by looking for crossovers with a signal line (a moving average of the StochRSI), similar to the way the Stochastic Oscillator is used. When the StochRSI crosses above the signal line, it is considered a bullish signal, and when it crosses below the signal line, it is considered a bearish signal.
It is essential to use the Stochastic RSI in conjunction with other technical analysis tools and indicators, as well as to consider the overall market context, to improve the accuracy and reliability of trading signals.
What is the Stochastic of RSX?
Instead of using RSI for the Stochastic RSI calculation, this indicator uses RSX.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-B Baseline
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Stacked 1: None
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 1
Outputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation 2 indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-BT Backtest or GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Stacked 1: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+ or GKD-BT Backtest
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Volatility Ratio Adaptive RSX [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Volatility Ratio Adaptive RSX is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: Volatility Ratio Adaptive RSX as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
1-Candle Rule Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close)
2. GKD-B Volatility/Volume agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
4. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
]█ Setting up the GKD
The GKD system involves chaining indicators together. These are the steps to set this up.
Use a GKD-C indicator alone on a chart
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Use a GKD-V indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Use a GKD-B indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Baseline (Baseline, Backtest)
1. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline"
Volatility/Volume (Volatility/Volume, Backte st)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Solo"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Signal Type" setting to "Crossing" (neither traditional nor both can be backtested)
3. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Volatility/Volume"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, a) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Trading" if using a directional GKD-V indicator; or, b) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full" if using a directional or non-directional GKD-V indicator (non-directional GKD-V can only test Longs and Shorts separately)
6. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Side" to "Long" or "Short
7. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
Solo Confirmation Simple (Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
1. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Solo Confirmation Complex without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
6. Import the GKD-C into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Solo Confirmation Complex with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
7. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Full GKD without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
9. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Full GKD with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Import the GKD-C Continuation indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
9. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
10. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Baseline + Volatility/Volume (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, make sure the "Signal Type" setting is set to "Traditional"
3. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
5. Import the GKD-V into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full". For this backtest, you must test Longs and Shorts separately
7. To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you can test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
█ GKD-C Volatility Ratio Adaptive RSX
What is the RSX?
The Jurik RSX is a technical indicator developed by Mark Jurik to measure the momentum and strength of price movements in financial markets, such as stocks, commodities, and currencies. It is an advanced version of the traditional Relative Strength Index (RSI), designed to offer smoother and less lagging signals compared to the standard RSI.
The main advantage of the Jurik RSX is that it provides more accurate and timely signals for traders and analysts, thanks to its improved calculation methods that reduce noise and lag in the indicator's output. This enables better decision-making when analyzing market trends and potential trading opportunities.
What is the Voaltility Ratio?
The volatility ratio is a technical analysis indicator used by traders and investors to measure the relative volatility of a financial instrument, such as stocks, commodities, or forex. It is calculated by comparing the True Range (TR) of the instrument to its average range over a specified period, typically expressed as a percentage. The higher the volatility ratio, the more volatile the instrument is considered to be.
The formula for the volatility ratio is:
Volatility Ratio (VR) = (Today's True Range) / (Average True Range over a specified period)
Where:
Today's True Range is the highest value among:
Current High - Current Low
Current High - Previous Close
Current Low - Previous Close
Average True Range (ATR) is the average of the True Range values over a specified period, typically 14 days.
Traders and investors use the volatility ratio to gauge the risk associated with a particular instrument and to identify potential entry and exit points. A high volatility ratio can signal strong price movements, while a low ratio may indicate stability or stagnation in price. The volatility ratio can also be used in conjunction with other technical indicators to create a more comprehensive trading strategy.
What is Volatility Ratio Adaptive RSX?
For this indicator the calculation of volatility is changed to the following:
Volatility Ratio (VR) = (Standard Deviation of Price) / (Simple Moving Average of Standard Deviation over a specified period)
Where:
src: source data (typically closing prices) of the financial instrument.
per: the period over which the standard deviation and simple moving average are calculated.
This version of the Volatility Ratio helps identify periods of high or low price volatility relative to the historical average over the specified period. A value above 1 indicates higher than average volatility, while a value below 1 suggests lower than average volatility. Traders and investors can use this indicator to assess the risk of a particular instrument, determine market sentiment, or identify potential trading opportunities.
What this looks like inside:
This code defines two functions, rsx() and volatratio(), and then calculates the Volatility Ratio Adaptive RSX by combining their outputs.
1. rsx(src, len, speed): This function calculates the Adaptive RSX (Relative Strength Index) based on the input source data (src), the lookback period (len), and the speed factor (speed). The function computes a smoothed version of the price momentum (mom_out) and its absolute version (moa_out) using an iterative process. The final output, rsiout, is the Adaptive RSX oscillator value, which is calculated by normalizing the momentum ratio to the 0-100 range.
2. volatratio(src, per): This function calculates the Volatility Ratio using the input source data (src) and the lookback period (per). It computes the standard deviation (dev) and its simple moving average (devavg) over the specified period, and then calculates the Volatility Ratio by dividing the standard deviation by its average.
The main part of the code calculates the Volatility Ratio Adaptive RSX using the rsx() and volatratio() functions:
-volRatio = volatratio(src, inpPeriod): It calculates the Volatility Ratio using the input source data (src) and the lookback period (inpPeriod).
-rsxout = _rsx(src, int(inpPeriod/volRatio), inpSpeed): It calculates the Adaptive RSX using the input source data (src), the adjusted lookback period (which is the original period divided by the Volatility Ratio), and the speed factor (inpSpeed).
The final output, rsxout, represents the Volatility Ratio Adaptive RSX oscillator. Traders can use this oscillator to identify potential entry and exit points, confirm trends, or detect price reversals based on overbought or oversold conditions.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-B Baseline
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Stacked 1: None
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 1
Outputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation 2 indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-BT Backtest or GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Stacked 1: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+ or GKD-BT Backtest
Additional features will be added in future releases.
